170504-37451760-Structural Specs-Tender Addendum

TENDER ADDENDUM SPECIFICATION
JUMEIRAH GATE
PREPARED FOR AL ASEEL INVESTMENTS | APRIL 2017
04
PACKAGE
STRUCTURAL
ENGINEERING
DOCUMENT HISTORY
PROJECT NUMBER AHR JBR/2016
Tender
Addendum 27/04/2017
Tender
Tender 28/03/2017
27/04/2017
Submission
Addendum
Purpose
Revision Originator Checked Reviewed Authorised Date
Description
PROJECT TEAM
DEVELOPMENT MANAGER AND Mirage Leisure and Development
PROJECT MANAGER
LEAD CONSULTANT WSP | PARSONS Brinckerhoff

ARCHITECT OF RECORD
LEAD ARCHITECT KILLA DESIGN
INTERIOR DESIGN KCA INTERNATIONAL
FAÇADE & BMU CONSULTANT KOLTAY FACADES
LANDSCAPE CONSULTANT Keo International Consultants
MEPD/SUSTAINABILITY RAMBOLL ME
CONSULTANT
PARKING & TIS CONSULTANT AURECON
SPECIALIST LIGHTING LIGHTING DESIGN

PARTNERSHIP
INTERNATIONAL
AV / ICT CONSULTANT PMK INTERNATIONAL
ACOUSTIC CONSULTANT ACOUSTIC LOGIC
KITCHEN/F&B/LAUNDRY/WASTE TRICON
Consultants
SPA CONSULTANT THE WELLNESS

SIGNAGE & WAYFINDING AIR DESIGN LIMITED
Consultant
ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT GlobalTech
QUANTITY SURVEYOR & Cost TURNER & TOWNSEND

Consultant
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS DIV. 03– CONCRETE
WSP | Parsons Brinckerhoff SECTION 01 4517 – STRUCTURAL MOVEMENTS AND BUILDING TOLERANCE
SECTION 01 4517 – STRUCTURAL MOVEMENTS AND BUILDING TOLERANCES .......................................................................... 2
PART 1 - GENERAL................................................................................................................................................................. 2
1.1 SUMMARY ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ....................................................................................................................................................... 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................................................................. 4
2.1 DESIGN CRITERIA ............................................................................................................................................................. 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................... 8
3.1 TOLERANCES ................................................................................................................................................................... 8
3.2 STRUCTURAL TOLERANCES, CONCRETE ........................................................................................................................... 9
3.3 STRUCTURAL TOLERANCES, STEEL ................................................................................................................................... 9
3.4 CONTROL OF BUILDING MOVEMENTS ........................................................................................................................... 10
3.5 INSTRUMENTATION ...................................................................................................................................................... 10
3.6 BUILDING MOVEMENT REPORTS ................................................................................................................................... 10
Page: 1 of 10
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS Div. 03– Concrete
WSP | Parsons Brinckerhoff Section 01 451 – Structural Movements and Building Tolerance
SECTION 01 4517 – STRUCTURAL MOVEMENTS AND BUILDING TOLERANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. General: Read this Section in conjunction with other related Sections, the Contract Drawings and the
Contract Conditions.
B. Appointment of independent specialist
1. It is in the main contractor scope to appoint a specialist ( MIDAS or similar) to carry out a detailed
column shortening analysis and to suggest and perform the required site measurements,
monitoring and corrections
2. It is in the main contractor scope to appoint a specialist to measure and monitor building
movement, tolerances and verticality of columns, cores and walls on site and suggest the required
corrections.
C. Section Includes
1. Structural movements, for cladding and movement joints, and building tolerances for structural
components
D. Related Sections and Documentation
1. Section 03 0000 - Concrete - General
2. Section 03 1100 - Concrete Forming and finishing
3. Section 03 3800 – Post Tensioned Slab
4. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing
E. Section Purpose Description
1. The purpose of this Section is to inform the Contractor and the specialist suppliers about the
Project, regarding the following topics:
a. To provide information on the anticipated movements of the structural frame under a series of
combined load conditions.
b. The requirements for use by the Contractor whose work involves either direct connection to the
structural frame or the placement of elements immediately adjacent to it.
c. The positional tolerances to which the major elements of the structural frame shall be assumed
to have been constructed shall be given.
d. Estimated deflections of the main structural elements.
e. Outline details of the main structural elements designed by the Engineer.
f. To highlight the requirements for coordination with adjacent elements.
Page: 2 of 10
2. These effects shall be managed to ensure that excessive cracking or distortion in the frame and
its finishes is avoided and lack of fit at material interfaces prevented. The Specification
describes both the sources and magnitudes of these effects and the design philosophy
adopted by in the development of the frame.
3. The deflection estimates should consider a construction sequence where the structural
frame of concrete foundations, cores, columns, beams and slabs shall be completed prior to
the installation of the cladding. Only when the cladding is complete and the building relatively
weatherproof would the superimposed dead loads be applied as the fit-out proceeds. It is
assumed that any temporary propping for the construction of any element is struck prior to the
commencement of the construction work of any finishes, including but not limited to cladding,
ceilings and services.
4. The performance of the building during erection and when in service is dependent upon the
philosophy outlined in this Work Section. Develop the Contractor packages to allow for these
effects in their work.
5. The Specification deals with the steel and concrete frame construction including foundations to top
of piles.
F. This Section provides information enabling the Contractor to connect to the structural frame in order to
properly interface with the structural design provided by the Engineer in the Contract Drawings, and to describe the
tolerances that shall be allowed for in any connection or junction with the main structural frame.
G. This Section provides the movements limits that may be experienced by the structural frame under the
imposed loadings. The calculated movements primarily address the installed work serviceability requirements from
the following:
1. The superimposed dead loads of the work including but not limited to the finishes, the cladding,
internal walls, ceilings and the services.
2. Live loads.
3. Wind loads.
4. Temperature changes.
5. Seismic loads.
H. The requirements of this Section shall be deemed to include all forms of construction and materials
including but not limited to blockwork, reinforced concrete, steelwork, stonework, gutters, dry lining and glazing.
I. The 'intended position' stated in this Section is defined as the theoretical position assuming no
tolerance, for columns this is typically the grid intersection. This definition shall be particularly important as
the slab edges shall be required to be set out to the grid 'intended position' not the centerline of steelwork as
constructed.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards, General: All Building Codes, Industry Standard specifications and applicable By-Laws
referred to in the Specification shall be the current published editions including all latest revisions, amendments,
addendums and additions.
1. Refer to all relevant ASTM International and ACI Standards for this Work Section. Where
there is no relevant ASTM or ACI standard the Contractor is to make reference to the relevant
Euro codes British versions.
Page: 3 of 10
a. Alternate standards may be proposed to the Engineer for consideration. The Engineer shall be
the sole judge as to whether the proposed standards adequately support the Design Intent.
B. Refer to Section 03 0000 Concrete - General for the references for all relevant ASTM, ACI, AISC and
BS EN standards and guidance documents not listed in this Section.
C. OTHER TESTING
Tests: Static Modulus of Elasticity to ASTM C 469-94
Sampling: see drawing 00005-AJB-WSP-SW-Z-00-Z-DR-STR-00005 and section 30000 Concrete –

General Notes for any requirement for mixes to be tested. Four tests for each mix consisting of a
Modulus test, a 28 day cube test and cube test at same age as the Modulus test if not carried out at
28days.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Lateral Movements, General
1. Building lateral movements shall result from combinations of the following
a. Dead and Live load drift due to mass offset from geometrical centres.
b. Dead load drift due to differential axial shortening.
c. Wind loads.
d. Seismic loads.
e. Thermal expansion and contraction of the building materials.
f. Notional horizontal loads, a material code specific load take account of normal construction
tolerances.
2. Horizontal loads applied to the exterior cladding of the building shall be transferred through
the restraints at floor or roof levels to the perimeter columns or directly into the slab edge. The
concrete floor plate acts as a diaphragm to transfer the horizontal loads back to the concrete
core walls. The core walls act as vertical cantilevers to transfer the horizontal loads to the
foundations where tensile and compressive forces shall be generated in the piles.
B. Lateral Movement, Concrete Frame
1. The sway deflection of the structure for serviceability conditions, excluding seismic conditions,
has been limited to building height/ 500.
2. Inter-storey drift for serviceability conditions, excluding seismic conditions, has been limited to
story height/400.
3. Seismic Drift Limit, Inelastic = 0.02 x storey height below level considered, in accordance with
Table 12.12-1 in ASCE 7.
Page: 4 of 10
4. To allow the estimation of actual sway deflection, the results of the finite element analysis of
the structure shall be prepared by the Contractor appointed specialist designer using specialised
modelling software (MIDAS or Engineer approved alternative).
5. Predicted design dead load lateral movements shall be calculated at key locations in the two
towers, which will be verified by site measurements.
C. Lateral Movement, Steel Structure
1. The link bridge structure will deflect laterally with the supporting towers. It is expected that the
east tower and east half of the bridge will deflect laterally slightly more than west part.
2. Predicted design dead load lateral movements shall be calculated by the Contractor appointed
specialist using specialised modelling software (MIDAS or Engineer approved alternative) at
key locations in the bridge structure, which will be verified by site measurements.
D. Vertical Movement, General
1. Building vertical movements shall result from combinations of the following:
a. Foundation settlement.
b. Permanent loads due to both self-weight of the structure and those applied after the structure
has been completed, including but not limited to floor finishes and cladding.
c. Superimposed floor live loads.
d. Seismic loads.
e. Thermal expansion and contraction of the building materials.
f. Axial shortening due to creep and shrinkage of concrete or composite elements.
2. Vertical loads applied to each floor plate shall be transferred through the flat slab to the
supporting columns and then to the pile foundations. In areas of transfer and on the perimeter
beams shall transfer vertical loads to the nearest adjacent column.
E. Vertical Movement, Concrete Frame
1. The Design has limited vertical movements to the following:
a. Total Movements: Shortening of concrete columns due to gravity load and temperature
changes = height/ 1500.
b. Differential movements due to imposed loads:
1). Beam, Internal Span = Span/ 360.
2. Differential Movements occurring after attachment of non-structural elements
= sum of the long term deflection due to all sustained loads and the immediate deflection due to any
additional live load.
a. Limit = Span/ 240 or 25mm, use 30mm for the span of more than 10m, whichever is lesser.
Page: 5 of 10
3. Estimated Movements, Design Assumptions and Limitations:
4. There are many factors that shall have significant effects on the deflections of concrete elements.
These shall be difficult to allow for and consequently, any calculated value given shall be
regarded as an estimate only.
5. Possible factors include the following:
a. Estimates of restraint provided by supports and curvature across the span shall be based
on simplified assumptions and loading arrangements.
b. Precise proportions of loading considered as long term shall be hard to predict. Usually they
shall be taken as 100% of the dead load and a proportion of imposed load, typically 25%
for offices and 75% for storage areas.
c. An accurate assessment of relative humidity is also difficult as this shall vary greatly over the life
of the building, from its exterior to internal condition for instance. It shall also be largely
influenced by the location of the Site.
d. Considerable differences in behaviour occur depending on whether the section has actually
cracked under bending, particularly for lightly reinforced members.
e. Variability of the structural properties of concrete.
f. Variability in loading rates.
6. Applicable load cases:
a. The deflection due to the self-weight of the floor slabs and beams: CDL.
b. The deflection due to the self-weight of the cladding: SDLC.
c. The deflection due to the self-weight of the finishes such as services and ceilings (superimposed
dead loads): SDL.
d. The deflection due to short term and permanent live loading: LL.
7. Each load case shall also contribute to the long term creep deflection over the life of the
building. By the nature of the calculations long term deflections shall not be calculated on a
load case by load case basis and, consequently, cannot be broken down into their constituent
parts due to each load. Most importantly creep shall not be considered as a separate deflection
to be 'added on' to each case but shall be intrinsic in the calculation of the total long term
deflection. An additional deflection due to shrinkage shall also be included.
8. The estimated total long term deflection shall be the deflection of the element due to 100% of
the dead, superimposed dead, cladding and permanent live loads where 25% of the live load
shall be considered permanent. This deflection figure shall also allow for shrinkage deflections and
creep.
9. The estimated total short term deflection shall be the deflection which has occurred at
completion of the construction of the cladding, based on the assumed sequence where no
finishes shall be installed prior to the weatherproofing of the building and therefore no
superimposed dead load applied. At this stage, since the building shall not be occupied yet, no
live load shall be applied.
Page: 6 of 10
10. The estimated total short term deflection figure shall be due to 100% of the dead and cladding
loads and also allow for a degree of shrinkage deflection.
11. The estimated total finishes deflection shall be the estimated total long term deflection minus
the estimated total short term deflection. This shall be the total deflection estimated to occur in
the long term after the completion of the cladding installation.
F. Vertical Movement, Steel Frame
1. The Design has limited vertical movements to the following:
a. Total Movements: Shortening of steel columns due to imposed load and temperature changes =
height/ 2000.
b. Single Beam/ Truss, Internal span:
1). Vertical Deflection due to Live Loads LL = Span/ 360.
2). Vertical Deflection due to Total Loads (DL+SDL+SDLC +LL) = Span/ 250.
c. Single Façade Support Beam/ Truss:
1). Vertical Deflection due to DL+SDLC = Span/ 500.
2). Vertical Deflection due to Imposed Loads = Span/ 360.
d. Single Façade Support Cantilever:
e. Vertical Deflection due to Imposed Loads = Span/ 250.
2. Estimated Movements, Design Assumptions and Limitations:
a. Permanent Dead Load:
1). The majority of the deflection resulting from the application of the dead load shall
normally have occurred once the construction of the main structural frame is
complete. This shall be known as the permanent dead load and it shall be the
theoretical deflection due to this proportion of the dead, load which shall be used
to derive any required pre-camber of the beams or link structure.
2). In reality, the deflection experienced on Site shall often be less than that
calculated. Permanent dead loads shall include the relevant elements, ensuring that
the building shall be wind and watertight. These shall include the dead load of
roofing and cladding systems.
3). The exact philosophy with respect to the pre-cambering of the link structure and
secondary beams shall be developed with the steelwork subcontractor once
appointed
b. Super-Imposed Dead Load: Super-imposed dead load deflections generally occur once the
main structure is complete and the building is wind and watertight. They shall include all
internal finishes including but not limited to ceilings, services and floor finishes.
c. Imposed Load:
Page: 7 of 10
1). Imposed load deflections shall be calculated using the loads relating to the
occupancy of the building and generally occur once the building is complete and
has been handed over to the Employer. The imposed load deflections shall be
therefore considered a serviceability deflection and shall be considered separately
from DLs and SDLs.
2). The Contract Drawings shall identify the estimated pre-cambering for each steelwork
element for gravity loads at final stage.
G. CONTROL OF BUILDING MOVEMENTS
1. The Contractor shall be responsibility for the control of building movements during the construction
of the building as follows.
a. Determine the effects of the movements calculated by the Contractor appointed specialist
and anticipating these movements in the construction to ensure that the completed works
are constructed to the tolerances specified, without lack of fit, locked in stresses,
deformations which could adversely affect the performance of the structure during its design
life.
b. Monitor the building movements during construction and taking all necessary measures to
compensate for any deviations observed in order that the requirements of this section are
satisfied.
c. Incorporating into his construction methods allowance for the control of building movements.
2. The contractor shall provide a detailed method statement describing his approach to the control of
building movements. This method statement should be supported by structural analysis and
calculations for the movements envisaged. The predictions of the building movement must take into
account the planned sequence and timing of the works.
3. The contractor shall establish survey control stations (a minimum of four) around the building, from
which the setting out and monitoring can be carried out. These stations must be on stable concrete
foundations not subject to long term settlement. The control stations shall be checked weekly for
movement by cross checking between them. Monitoring points will be established at various floors
up the building with a minimum of four points on each of the floors to be monitored. Every fourth
floor shall be selected for monitoring up the building along with four monitoring points on the
foundation raft. The monitoring points shall record both horizontal and vertical movements.
Recordings of all monitoring points shall be carried out every four weeks.
4. The Contractor shall provide technical details of the survey along with calibration certificates. The
details should include the type, make, model and accuracy of the proposed equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TOLERANCES
A. Tolerances, Introduction
1. The structure has generally been developed on the basis of the tolerances laid out in AISC 303-
05 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, augmented by the UK National
Structural Steelwork Specification (NSSS) and ACI 117 Specification for Tolerances for
Page: 8 of 10
Concrete Construction and Materials with limits tightened as necessary to suit the anticipated
requirements of the cladding Subcontractor.
B. Accumulation of Tolerances
1. Tolerances shall be assumed to combine in the manner described in BS 5606 'Accuracy in

Building'. The code implies that induced deviations, meaning inevitable deviations due to the
building process, shall be combined by taking the square root of the sum of the squares of the
individual deviations. Inherent deflections, meaning inevitable deflections due to material
properties, shall be added arithmetically. This follows the principle that it shall be statistically
unlikely for all possible deviations to combine in the worst possible way.
C. Setting-Out Tolerance
1. Setting-out has a number of determined tolerances, many of which define the allowable
deviation from a datum; generally ordinance datum. Once main setting-out control has been
established within the Site, it shall be recommended that the same control stations be used by
all disciplines. This shall eliminate any error that has occurred within the transfer of the
control from Dubai Municipality Datum (DMD) and therefore also eliminate an accumulation of
tolerance that shall otherwise occur by each discipline using their own setting-out stations. If
the level for the steelwork shall be used for the follow-on disciplines, then the setting-out
tolerance shall not accumulate.
3.2 STRUCTURAL TOLERANCES, CONCRETE
A. Tolerances for cast-in-place concrete shall be in accordance with the information below from ACI
117, unless otherwise indicated by other concrete Work Sections within the Specification or within Section
033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1. Structural tolerances for concrete work shall not be cumulative.
2. Permitted deviation on slab thickness in accordance with ACI 117 Part 4.4.1 shall be as follows:
a. Up to and including 300mm thick in-situ slabs = +10mm, -7mm.
3. Permitted deviation on slab level in accordance with ACI 117 Part 4.3.1.2 shall be as follows:
a. Top of slab elevation before removal of props = ±10mm.
4. Permitted deviation on vertical translation and rotation of lift shaft walls for slip-form and jump-
form in accordance with ACI 117 Part 7.1.1 shall be as indicated within Tolerances, Section
030000 - Part 18 A.
3.3 STRUCTURAL TOLERANCES, STEEL
A. Structural Tolerances for Steelwork shall be in accordance with AISC 303-05 Code of Standard Practice
for Steel Buildings and Bridges, augmented by the UK National Structural Steelwork Specification (NSSS)
1. Manufacturing and Fabrication Tolerances: Refer to Tolerances, section 051200 – clause 3.5.
a. Manufacturing and fabrication tolerances include all those associated with normal workshop
operations in the production of the structural steel beams and columns except welding. The
limits on tolerances of this nature shall be as described in the National Structural Steelwork
Specification and also in BS 4: Part 1 and BS EN 10034 for rolled sections.
Page: 9 of 10
b. These tolerances shall affect the final constructed level of the roof level. The tolerances shall
be fully understood in order to ensure that the required services zones in the raised floor and
suspended ceiling shall be achieved.
1). Refer to Tolerances, section 051200 – clause 3.5 for steel work tolerances.
2). Refer to Tolerances, section 053100 – clause 3.4 for metal deck tolerances.
3.4 CONTROL OF BUILDING MOVEMENTS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the management and control of the building movements during
the construction phase, using survey and monitoring techniques to ensure that the that the completed works are
constructed to the tolerances specified, without lack of fit, locked in stresses, deformations which could
adversely affect the performance of the structure during its design life.
B. The Contractor shall allow for taking all necessary measures to compensate for any deviations observed
in order that the requirements of the final building tolerance are met.
C. The Contractor shall incorporate into his construction methods and fabrications, allowance for the
building movements including likely deviations from the predicted design values.
D. The Contractor should prepare supporting calculations to his method statements and temporary works
design taking into account but not necessary limited to the design criteria given in this document and the Contract
Drawings.
E. The Contractor shall provide a detailed method statement describing his approach to the control of
building movements. This method statement should be supported by structural analysis and calculations for
the movements envisaged. The predictions of the building movement must take into account the planned
sequence and timing of the works. It is anticipated that the Contractor will need to prepare a 3d FE structural
model of the link bridge structure to properly examine the lifting and construction operations.
F. The Contractor shall establish survey control stations around the buildings, from which the setting out
and monitoring can be carried out. These stations must be on stable concrete foundations not subject to long
term settlement. The control stations shall be checked weekly for movement by cross checking between
them. Monitoring points will be established at various floors up the building with a minimum of eight
points on each of the tower floors and foundation raft. The monitoring points will recorded both horizontal
and vertical movements. Recordings of at all monitoring points will be carried out every two weeks and at the
addition of every ten floors.
3.5 INSTRUMENTATION
A. Precision inclination sensors that are able to measure inclination and direction of movement.
Automatic total stations for monitoring points. A Data acquisition system for remote data collection.
B. Strain Gauges linked to data acquisition system
C. The Contractor shall provide technical details of the survey equipment along with calibration
certificates. The details should include the type, make, model and accuracy of the proposed equipment.
3.6 BUILDING MOVEMENT REPORTS
A. The Contractor will prepare a building movement and monitoring report every four weeks. They will
tabulate the building movements, stresses at the monitoring points. The report should also summarize the
stage of construction at the time of monitoring in general terms such as concrete cast level, blockwork
construction level, and cladding construction level. The daily weather records with respect to temperature,
humidity and wind speed should also form part of this report
END OF SECTION
Page: 10 of 10
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS Division 03 – CONCRETE
WSP | Parsons Brinckerhoff Section 030000 - CONCRETE: GENERAL
SECTION 030000 – CONCRETE .............................................................................................................3

PART 1 GENERAL ...........................................................................................................................3
1.1 QUALIFIED TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES .......................................................................... 3
PART 2 MIX REQUIREMENTS .........................................................................................................3
PART 3 CEMENT, GGBS & MICROSILICA .........................................................................................6
3.1 PROPERTIES .................................................................................................................................... 6
3.2 ACCEPTANCE................................................................................................................................... 7
3.3 DELIVERY......................................................................................................................................... 7
PART 4 AGGREGATES ....................................................................................................................7
4.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................... 7
4.2 TESTS .............................................................................................................................................. 7
4.3 TESTS FREQUENCY .......................................................................................................................... 8
4.4 TEST DETAILS .................................................................................................................................. 8
4.5 FINE AGGREGATES .......................................................................................................................... 9
PART 5 WATER..............................................................................................................................9
PART 6 ADMIXTURES .................................................................................................................. 10
6.2 ADMIXTURES FOR SELF-COMPACTING CONCRETE ...................................................................... 11
PART 7 CONTROL OF CHLORIDES AND SULPHATES ....................................................................... 18
PART 8 MIX DESIGN & TRIAL MIXES ............................................................................................. 19
PART 9 TRIAL MIX ....................................................................................................................... 20
PART 10 WATER CEMENT RATIO ................................................................................................... 21
PART 11 DRYING SHRINKAGE ........................................................................................................ 21
PART 12 TESTS ON CONCRETE ....................................................................................................... 22
12.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 22
12.2 SAMPLING..................................................................................................................................... 22
12.3 STRENGTH TESTING ...................................................................................................................... 23
12.4 DURABILITY TESTING .................................................................................................................... 24
PART 13 PREPARATION FOR CONCRETE WORKS ............................................................................ 25
PART 14 READY MIXED CONCRETE ................................................................................................ 25
14.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 25
14.2 SUPPLIER....................................................................................................................................... 25
Page: 1 of 40
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS Division 03 – CONCRETE
WSP | Parsons Brinckerhoff Section 030000 - CONCRETE: GENERAL
14.3 DELIVERY....................................................................................................................................... 26
14.4 TRANSPORTING ............................................................................................................................ 26
14.5 PLACING AND COMPACTING ........................................................................................................ 26
PART 15 FRESH CONCRETE TEMPERATURE .................................................................................... 29
PART 16 TESTS ON FRESH CONCRETE ............................................................................................. 29
16.2 DEEP SECTIONS AND LARGE VOLUME POURS ............................................................................. 30
PART 17 CURING ........................................................................................................................... 32
17.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 32
17.2 CURING AND PROTECTION ........................................................................................................... 32
17.3 CURING COMPOUND.................................................................................................................... 32
17.4 CURING OF HORIZONTAL SURFACES ............................................................................................ 33
17.5 CURING OF VERTICAL SURFACES .................................................................................................. 33
17.6 CURING OF ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE...................................................................................... 34
PART 18 TOLERANCES ................................................................................................................... 34
PART 19 CONCRETE – NON CONFORMANCE AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS ........................................ 37
19.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 37
19.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS .............................................................................................................. 38
19.3 OUT OF TOLERANCE CONSTRUCTION .......................................................................................... 38
19.4 REPAIRS USING STRUCTURAL REPAIR MORTARS AND GROUTS .................................................. 38
19.5 CRACKS IN THE CONCRETE ........................................................................................................... 38
PART 20 EMBEDDED SERVICES AND OPENINGS.............................................................................. 39
PART 21 POST CONSTRUCTION CUTTING OF CONCRETE ................................................................. 39
Page: 2 of 40
WSP | Parsons Brinckerhoff Section 030000 - Concrete: General
SECTION 030000 – CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 QUALIFIED TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES
A. As indicated in individual Work Sections of the Specification, the Contractor has to engage the services of an
independent Qualified Testing Agency to perform the specified testing.
B. Employment of the agency does not relieve the Contractor of his obligation to perform work in accordance with
the requirements of the Contract Documents.
C. The Contractor Employed Agency to provide the following:
1. Qualified Testing Agency: In accordance with requirements of ASTM E329, ASTM E543, ASTM C1021, ASTM
C1077 and ASTM C1093
2. Qualified Inspection Agency: In accordance with the requirements of ASTM D3740 and ASTM E329
3. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in Dubai, UAE
4. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered engineer on staff to review services.
5. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals either by NIST or using an NIST established
Measurement Assurance Program, under a laboratory measurement quality assurance programme.
PART 2 MIX REQUIREMENTS
A. It is the intent of this Specification to require the use of sustainable concrete. This is to be achieved by the
replacement of a significant amount of Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) with Ground Granulated Blast Furnace
Slag (GGBS).
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of the concrete mix in accordance with the requirements and
limiting criteria as set out in this specification including chloride and sulphate protection requirements and in
accordance with requirements of the ground investigation report provided with the Tender documents.
C. All concrete mixes to be designed to BS 8500-1/ BS 8500-2 and BS EN 206-1 using Ordinary Portland Cement
with the Ground Granulated Blast furnace Slag (GGBS) and micro silica contents specified below.
D. The design life of the structure shall a minimum of 50 years. The contractor shall ensure that the predicted end-
of-life for concrete elements will be achieved (ACI 365.1R-00).
Page: 3 of 40
Elements & Class of Blinding Basement Walls Raft and Pile Podium Podium Podium Podium Tower Walls & Tower Sub & Superstruc-
Concrete/Properties Caps Substructure Substructure Superstructure Superstructure Composite Columns ture Slabs & Beams
Slabs & Beams Columns and Columns and Slabs & Beams (within the (Between the
Walls Walls Tower footprint) expansion joints)
Exposure Conditions External in Very Severe: Very Severe: Severe: External Severe: External Moderate: Moderate: Moderate: Internal Moderate:
contact External in con- External in con- and Internal and Internal Internal Internal controlled environ- Internal
with tact with WPM tact with WPM uncontrolled uncontrolled controlled controlled ment controlled
ground environment environment environment environment environment
Min Characteristic Com- 25 60 50 45 60 60 45 94 70
pressive Cube Strength @
28 Days, mPa
Concrete Mix SRC GGBS+OPC+SF GGBS+OPC+SF GGBS+OPC OR GGBS+OPC OR OPC OPC OPC OPC
OR FA+OPC+SF OR FA+OPC+SF FA+OPC FA+OPC
Max Rapid Chloride Per- 1000 1000 1200 1200 3800 3800 3800 3800
meability to AASHTO T277
(Coulombs)
Max Water Permeability 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20
to DIN 1048 (mm)
Max Initial Surface Ab- 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
sorption to BS1881 Part
2
208 (ml/m /s)
30 min Water Absorption 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 2
to BS1881 Part 122 (%)
Max Drying Shrinkage to 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
BS812 Part 120 (%)
Min Cement Content 250 380 380 400 380 380 380 380 400
(kg/m3)
Max Water/Cement Ratio 0.6 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38
Minimum GGBS Content, 60 60 60 60
% of Total Cementing
Page: 4 of 40
Elements & Class of Blinding Basement Walls Raft and Pile Podium Podium Podium Podium Tower Walls & Tower Sub & Superstruc-
Concrete/Properties Caps Substructure Substructure Superstructure Superstructure Composite Columns ture Slabs & Beams
Slabs & Beams Columns and Columns and Slabs & Beams (within the (Between the
Walls Walls Tower footprint) expansion joints)
Material
Minimum Silica Fume, % 4 4 4 4
of Total Cementing Mate-
rial
Maximum Slump, (mm) 175+/-25 175+/-25 175+/-25 175+/-25 175+/-25 175+/-25 175+/-25 175+/-25
Maximum Flow test, (mm) 550+/-50 550+/-50 550+/-50 550+/-50 550+/-50 550+/-50 550+/-50 550+/-50
Abbreviations
GGBS Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag - replacement for cement
OPC Ordinary Portland Cement
SF Silica Fume
SRC Sulphate Resisting Cement Concrete
WPC Waterproof Concrete
WPM Waterproof Membrane
FA Pulverised Fly-Ash not less than 25% of the mix cement content
Page: 5 of 40
Notes:
1. Super plasticizing admixture required in all concrete.
2. The nominal maximum size of aggregate shall be 20mm unless otherwise accepted.
3. All mix designs shall be subject to the acceptance of the Engineer.
4. When the proposed slump exceeds 150 mm, Flow test shall be conducted in addition to slump test.
5. In addition to the requirements listed above the Contractor shall ensure that all concrete mix design
comply with the recommendations given in the geotechnical report especially in relation to sulphate
and chloride protection
6. Special admixture for self-compacting concrete shall be as proposed by specialist supplier.
PART 3 CEMENT, GGBS & MICROSILICA
3.1 PROPERTIES
A. The cement shall comply with the requirements of the following codes:
1. Relevant codes of Practice
2. BS EN 197: 2000
3. BS EN 196:2005
4. ASTM C 150-I
5. ASTM C150-V
6. ASTM C186
B. Test results must be submitted for every consignment. In addition a full range of tests shall be performed in
accepted independent laboratory in the trial mix stage and every month during the concreting period. Refer to
Table 030000-1 for compliance requirements, properties and testing requirements.
C. Silica Fume (Microsilica): Microsilica shall be dry-densified and shall come from the same source throughout the
project. If a single source cannot be maintained, laboratory testing of each new source shall be required before
acceptance by the Consultant at no cost to the Employer. It shall comply with the requirements of the following
codes:
1. Relevant codes of Practice
2. ASTM C 1240-05
3. prEN 13263:2005
4. JSA JIS A 6207:2000
D. Submit manufacturers’ certificate for all parameters for every consignment.
E. Silica Fume shall be furnace direct and shall originate from either a silicon metal plant or a ferro silicon plant.
The Contractor shall provide certificate of compliance with ASTM C1240 each month. Micro silica from reputed
brands only such as Elkem, Holcim or similar accepted shall be used. Refer to Table 030000-1 for compliance
requirements, properties and testing requirements.
F. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 15167:2006. The Contractor
shall provide certificate of compliance each month.
Page: 6 of 40
G. Submit manufacturers’ certificate for all parameters for every consignment. Refer to Table 030000-1 for
compliance requirements, properties and testing requirements
3.2 ACCEPTANCE
A. Before ordering cementing materials, the Contractor shall submit details giving the following information for
acceptance by the Engineer:
1. Name of proposed supplier
2. Cementing type
3. Compliance with the foregoing tests
4. Proposal for transportation and storage of cementing materials.
B. In certain cases the Engineer may require the Contractor, at his or the supplier's expense, to forward samples of
the proposed material to an independent laboratory for analysis.
C. The testing laboratory shall be as accepted by the Engineer, approved by the local authority and accredited for
conducting the specific tests required.
3.3 DELIVERY
A. Each consignment of cement / cement replacement additives shall be accompanied by a certificate showing the
results of tests on each days bulk production included in the consignment. A copy of the certificate shall be
given to the Engineer.
B. The cementing materials shall be stored in such a manner that separate consignments can be segregated if
necessary.
C. All cementing materials shall be delivered to the site in the original sealed and branded bags or containers of the
manufacturer, or may be bulk cement if accepted by the Engineer. Cement shall be stored in an accepted
manner to prevent deterioration.
D. Bagged cement shall be stored in accepted waterproof, ventilated sheds with raised floors.
PART 4 AGGREGATES
4.1 GENERAL
A. Before commencing the Works, the Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's acceptance for his proposed sources
of aggregates. Samples of aggregate shall be sampled and tested by an accepted independent laboratory.
B. Aggregates shall be free from earth, dust, loam, clay, organic matter or any other impurities and shall comply in
all respects with BS 882 & BS EN 12620:2002+A1:2008. Aggregates shall be hard dense, durable gravel or stone.
C. Aggregate shall be stored in concrete based bins or on stages to prevent intermixing and the inclusion of dirt
and foreign materials. Each size of aggregate shall be stored separately. Storage bins shall be emptied and
cleaned regularly.
4.2 TESTS
A. The aggregates shall be tested for the following properties as per the recommendations to the appropriate
British or ASTM Standards:
1. Standard
2. Grading (Overall and Individual) BS EN 12620:2002 + A1:2008
Page: 7 of 40
3. Magnesium Sulphate Soundness ASTM C88
4. Specific Gravity BS EN 12620:2002 + A1:2008
5. Water absorption BS EN 12620:2002 + A1:2008
6. Clay, Silt, Dust content BS EN 12620:2002 + A1:2008
7. Organic Impurities ASTM C40
8. Sulphate Content BS1377:1990
9. Chloride Content BS 812 Part 117, 118:1998
10. Aggregate Crushing Value BS EN 12620:2002 + A1:2008
11. Aggregate Impact Value BS EN 12620:2002 + A1:2008
12. Ten pc Fines Value BS EN 12620:2002 + A1:2008
13. Elongation Index BS EN 12620:2002 + A1:2008
14. Flakiness Index BS EN 12620:2002 + A1:2008
15. Potential Alkali Reactivity ASTM C289
16. Los Angeles Abrasion ASTM C131/535
17. Aggregate Shrinkage BRE Digest 357-1991
18. Moisture content BS EN 12620:2002 + A1:2008
19. Shell Content BS EN 12620:2002 + A1:2008
B. Note: The Contractor shall ensure that the proposed testing laboratory has the facility to test the aggregates to
BS EN or ASTM Standards indicated above. Equivalent BS standards shall be permitted only with the Engineer’s
prior acceptance.
4.3 TESTS FREQUENCY
A. All tests shall be carried out, as appropriate, at the commencement of the works and as instructed by the
Engineer, but at a frequency not less than listed in Table 030000-1 below. The costs of all testing shall be borne
by the Contractor and shall be included in his rates for the work.
B. If deliveries of new aggregates are less frequent than the frequencies given in the Table 030000-1, tests need
only be carried out for each new delivery of aggregate.
4.4 TEST DETAILS
A. Refer Table 030000-1 for test details and requirements.
B. Gradings
1. Gradings shall comply with the values given in Section 4.3 BS EN 12620:2002+A1:2008
2. The combined grading results shall not vary by more than 5% from the percentage passing any sieve size as
established in the accepted mix trials. If the combined grading does not meet this requirement then new
trial mixes shall be submitted for acceptance and concreting shall stop until the new trial mixes have been
accepted.
C. Clay, Silt, Dust Content
1. The amount of material passing a 75 micron BS 410 fine test sieve when tested in accordance with the wet
sieving method of BS EN 12620:2002 + A1:2008 shall not exceed the values given in Table 03000-1.
D. Test 6: Organic Impurities
Page: 8 of 40
1. The limits of organic impurities shall not, when tested in accordance with ASTM C40, indicate a colour
darker than the standard. If a darker colour does result further investigation shall be carried out by
comparative cube tests to ascertain whether there is a loss in strength.
E. Test 7: Sulphate Content
1. The acid soluble sulphate content measured as SO3 for both coarse and fine aggregates shall not exceed
the values given in Table 03000-1 subject to the over-riding values for total sulphate content in the mix not
exceeding those given in Section under control of Chlorides and Sulphates below.
F. Test 8: Chloride Content
1. The acid soluble chloride content (measured as Cl ion) shall not exceed the values given in Table 03000-1
subject to the overriding values for total chloride content in the mix not exceeding those given in Section
under control of Chlorides and Sulphates below.
G. Test 14: Potential Alkali: Reactivity
1. The alkali reactivity shall be assessed by testing in accordance with ASTM C289. If potentially reactive
material is indicated, then mortar bar tests shall be carried out in accordance with ASTM C227 to comply
with the limits given in ASTM C33 i.e. 0.05% at 3 months and 0.1% at 6 months.
H. Test 17: Moisture Content
1. This shall be regularly tested in accordance with BS EN 12620:2002 + A1:2008. In addition the Contractor
shall use an accepted method (such as 'speedy') to rapidly determine the moisture content of aggregates to
calculate the amount of water to be added to the concrete mix.
I. Test 18: Hollow Shells
1. The percentage of hollow shells retained on a 2.36mm sieve when tested in accordance with BS EN
12620:2002 + A1:2008 shall not exceed the values given in Table 03000-1.
4.5 FINE AGGREGATES
A. Fine aggregates shall be clean, sharp coarse sand from an accepted source complying with BS EN 12620:2002 +
A1:2008 unless otherwise permitted in writing by the Engineer.
B. Fine aggregate shall pass through a 5mm BS test sieve.
C. The grading of fine aggregate may be adjusted by the use of a combination of crushed sand, natural sand and
beach sand in accepted proportions to obtain a satisfactory, dense concrete.
D. Crushed sand may not be used alone without written acceptance.
E. Beach sand may be used provided that the Contractor submits, and is given acceptance for his written proposals
for meeting the requirements for grading and salt content contained in this specification.
F. Sand for mortar shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 12620:2002 + A1:2008.
PART 5 WATER
A. Water used in mixing shall be clean and free from chemical or organic taints in any quantities likely to harm the
concrete. It shall comply with the suggested standard given in the Appendix to BS EN 8500 part 1 and 2:2002 +
BS EN 206 Part 1. Mixing water for concrete: Specification for sampling, testing and assessing suitability of
water, including water recovered from processes in concrete industry, as mixing water for concrete and with BS
EN 8500 Part 1 and 2:2002 + BS EN 206 Part 1.
B. Samples shall be submitted, if required by the Engineer, for chemical analysis and acceptance before
commencement of the work.
Page: 9 of 40
C. The acid soluble sulphate (SO3) and acid soluble chloride as Cl ion content shall not exceed the values given in
Table 03000-1. These limits shall be subject to the overall limit given for the concrete as mixed.
PART 6 ADMIXTURES
A. Admixtures shall not be used without the written acceptance of the Engineer.
B. Admixtures where accepted by the Engineer shall be used strictly at the agreed dosage rates in strict accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
C. All admixtures shall be of fresh stock.
D. New generation admixtures used for self-compacting concrete/ free flow concrete shall be accepted by the
Engineer.
E. Admixtures shall be products manufactured for use in concrete. All effects of the admixtures on the new and
hardened concrete shall be well documented by the manufacturer, and the admixtures shall have proven record
of use under similar conditions. Effects of over dosage shall be stated.
F. Admixtures containing chlorides or nitrates shall not be accepted.
G. The Contractor shall submit a comprehensive technical description and recommendation for handling and use
from the manufacturer. When more than one admixture is to be used the compatibility of the materials shall
have been ascertained by tests and accepted in writing by the manufacturer(s). Particular attention shall be paid
when the admixture is used with cement replacement additives like PFA, GGBS and micro silica for the effects
on fresh concrete property.
H. Admixtures shall be handled and stored according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. The materials shall
be protected from any contamination. Ready mix concrete supplier must ensure that the sludge formed in the
bottom of the storage tank is regularly cleaned.
I. Addition of admixture at site to prolong the setting time or improve the workability shall be strictly forbidden.
J. Concrete additives accepted by the Engineer shall be used to improve consistency, quality, workability and
strength of concrete.
K. Chemical admixture manufacturer shall provide certified test reports from qualified, independent, accredited
laboratories showing actual test results indicating materials comply in all respects with durability requirements.
L. High range water reducing admixtures shall be Napthalene Sulphonate Polymer based materials like Conplast
SP2000,Conplast SP432MS from Al Gurg Fosroc LLC or Glenium SKY range of admixtures from BASF or
acceptable equivalent by the Engineer shall be used.
M. Water reducing and retarding Admixtures shall conform to BSEN-934 – 2 or ASTM C 494 Type G.
N. All concrete specified to be as water proof shall contain hydrophobic pore blocking admixture.
O. Hydrophobic pore blocking admixture shall not be based on bituminous, earth chemicals, and shall not generate
ammonia gas when mixed in concrete.
P. Hydrophobic pore blocking admixture for water proof concrete shall be Conplast WP400 as manufactured by Al
Gurg Fosroc LLC or acceptable equivalent by the Engineer.
Q. Hydrophobic pore blocking admixture, and other related admixtures shall be obtained from the single
manufacturer with technical expertise and local experience.
Page: 10 of 40
6.2 ADMIXTURES FOR SELF-COMPACTING CONCRETE
A. Self-Compacting Concrete shall be designed with 20mm or 10mm aggregates, depending upon the
reinforcement spacing, location and placement requirements.
B. Self-Compacting Concrete shall show a minimum of 650mm slump cone flow spread (uncompact) at the time of
placement.
C. Self-Compacting Concrete admixture shall be based on Polycarboxylate technology, and may be combined with
viscosity modifiers (if required).
D. Self-Compacting Concrete admixture shall be Structuro 530 and viscosity modifier Structuro 480, as
manufactured by Al Gurg Fosroc LLC, Glenium range from BASF or acceptable equivalent by the Engineer.
Page: 11 of 40
TABLE 030000 – 1 SCHEDULE OF TESTS ON CONCRETE INGREDIENTS
Material, Code Ref Tests Limits Plant Lab Ind Lab Manf Cert Remarks
Cement Alkali Content (Na2O+0.658K2O) <0.6% Every month For each consignment One set of tests to be per-
BS EN 197:2000 formed in the independent la-
C3A for OPC Min 4% Max 8% Every month For each consignment
BSEN 195:2005 boratory every month.
C3A for SRC <4% Every month For each consignment
ASTM C 150-I All plant lab test results and
Heat of Hydration 7d <75 cal/gm Every month For each consignment manufacturer’s certificates to
ASTM C150-V
Specific Surface Min 225; Max 325 m2/kg Every month For each consignment be c for each consignment
ASTM C-186
SO3 Content for SRPC 3.5% Every month For each consignment
Temperature at the time of mixing 750C Max Regular check & report - -
Fineness, retained 45 micron sieve (max) <12% Every month For each consignment
GGBS Loss on Ignition <3% Every month For each consignment
Moisture Content <0.5% Every month For each consignment
BSEN 15167:2006
Specific Surface (min) 275 m2/kg - For each consignment
Setting Time – initial, minimum 60 min - For each consignment
Soundness <10mm - For each consignment
Sulfur as SO3 <2% - For each consignment
Chloride <0.10% - For each consignment
Calcium Oxide as CaO <10% - For each consignment
Water requirement <95% of PC - For each consignment
Activity Index >75% @ 28 days - For each consignment
Strength Factor >0.80 @ 28 days - For each consignment
Glass Content (min) 67% - For each consignment
Particle Density >2000 kg/m3 - For each consignment
Page: 12 of 40
Magnesium Oxide MgO (max) 14% - For each consignment
CaO+MgO+SiO2 (min) 67% - For each consignment
Comp Strength (min) 32.5 N/mm2 - For each consignment BSEN 196-1, 28 d –
30%OPC+70% ggbs
Fineness, retained 45 micron sieve (max) < 10% Every month For each consignment
MICROSILICA Loss on Ignition < 4% Every month For each consignment
Moisture Content < 2% Every month For each consignment
ASTM C 1240-04
Specific Surface (min) > 18000 m2/kg - For each consignment
BSEN 13263:2005
JIS A 6207:2000 Soundness < 0.2% - For each consignment
Sulfur as SO3 < 1.5% - For each consignment
Chloride < 0.1% - For each consignment
Calcium Oxide as CaO < 1% - For each consignment
Activity Index > 105% - For each consignment
SiO2 < 90% - For each consignment
Al2O3 < 1% - For each consignment
Fe2O3 < 1.5% - For each consignment
Magnesium Oxide MgO (max) < 2% - For each consignment
Bulk Density (Densified Powder) < 700 kg/m3 - For each consignment
SO3 < 1.5% - For each consignment
Alkali as Na2O < 4.5% - For each consignment
C < 3% - For each consignment
Free Si < 0.4% - For each consignment
Fine Aggregate Grading Combined aggregate Every 2days or each Every 30 days or BSEN 12620-2002+A1:2008
Comply to BS 812, shall not vary more delivery change of
BSEN than 5% Source
Page: 13 of 40
12620:2002+A1 Soundness max loss in five cycles (% by 10% Every 30 days Mag. Sulphate
2008 weight) ASTM C88
Specific gravity (apparent) > 2.6 Every 30 days BSEN 12620-2002+A1:2008
Water absorption < 2% Every 30 days BSEN 12620-2002+A1:2008
Clay, silt, dust content (Materials finer < 3% (natural) Every 3.5 days or each Every Month or BSEN 12620-2002+A1:2008
than 75 micron) < 5% (crushed) delivery change of
Source
Page: 14 of 40
Organic impurities Colour lighter than std Every 30 days ASTM C40
colour
Total acid soluble sulphate <0.4% Every 3.5 days Every 30 days BS 1377:1990
Chloride content <0.05% Every 2days Every 30 days BS812:117,118, 1998
Fine Aggregate Potential Reactivity – 3 mo. Expansion 0.05% At trial mix ASTM C 289
Comply to BS 812, Aggregates, chemical method 6 mo. expansion stage and ASTM C 227, ASTM C 33
BSEN Cement- agg combn < 0.10% change of
12620:2002+A1 source
2008 Aggregate Shrinkage <0.05% At trial mix BRE Digest 357
stage and
change of
source
Moisture Content Using moisture meters Every day BSEN 12620-2002+A1:2008
report in concrete de-
livery ticket
Shell Content (2.36mm) < 10% Every 30 days BSEN 12620-2002+A1:2008
Coarse Aggregate Grading Section 4.3 of BSEN Every 2days or each Every 30 days BSEN 12620-2002+A1:2008
Comply to BS 812, 12620. delivery
BSEN Combined aggregate
12620:2002+A1 shall not vary more
2008 than 5%
Soundness max loss in five cycles (% by 10% Every 30 days or Mag. Sulphate
weight) change of ASTM C88
source
Specific gravity (apparent) > 2.6 Every 30 days BSEN 12620-2002+A1:2008
Water absorption < 2% Every 30 days BSEN 12620-2002+A1:2008
Clay, silt, dust content (Materials finer < 1% (natural) Every 3.5 days or Every Month or BSEN 12620-2002+A1:2008
than 75 micron) < 3% (crushed) each delivery change of
Source
Page: 15 of 40
Organic impurities Colour lighter than std Every 30 days ASTM C40
colour
Total acid soluble sulphate <0.4% Every 3.5 days Every 30 days BS 1377:1990
Chloride content <0.02% Every 2 days Every 30 days BS812:117,118, 1998
Aggregate crushing value <20% Every 30 days BSEN 12620-2002+A1:2008
Material, Tests Limits Plant Ind Lab Manf Cert

Code Ref Lab
Coarse Aggregate Aggregate impact value <45% Every 30 days BSEN 12620-2002+A1:2008
Comply to BS 812, BSEN Ten pc fines value >75kN Every 30 days BSEN 12620-2002+A1:2008
12620:2002+A1 2008
Elongation index < 25% Every 7 Every 30 days BSEN 12620-2002+A1:2008
days
Flakiness index < 25% Every 7 Every 30 days BSEN 12620-2002+A1:2008
days
Potential Reactivity – 3 mo. Expansion 0.05% At trial mix stage and
Aggregates, chemical 6 mo. expansion change of source ASTM C 289
method < 0.10% ASTM C 227, ASTM C 33
Cement- agg combn
Los Angeles Abrasion < 35% Every 30 days ASTM C131/535
Aggregate Shrinkage < 0.05% At trial mix stage and BRE Digest 357
change of source
Moisture Content Using moisture meters Every BSEN 12620-2002+A1:2008
report in conc. Del. ticket day
Water PH value 7.0 – 9.0 Every Every Month Additionally submit water
BS EN 8500 part 1 & 2:2002, Week plants certificate for the site
Total Dissolved Solids <2000ppm
Page: 16 of 40
Material, Tests Limits Plant Ind Lab Manf Cert

Code Ref Lab
BS EN 206 part 1 Suspended Solids <2000ppm water.
BS EN 1008 - 2002
Chloride as Cl <350ppm
Sulphates as SO3 <500ppm
Alkali HCO3/ CO3 <500ppm
Organic Impurities Colour/ Odour
Admixture (Plasticiser/ Re- Every Month/ Consignment Indicate Code Compliance BS EN 934-2
tarder) (Submit in the first week of or ASTM C 494 Type G as appropriate
every month)
Page: 17 of 40
PART 7 CONTROL OF CHLORIDES AND SULPHATES
A. The levels of equivalent acid soluble chlorides as (Cl ion) in the constituents of concrete as stated elsewhere are
indicative and are subject to the over-riding limits for the mixes.
B. The total estimated chloride ion content as a percentage by weight of the cement in the mix shall not exceed
the following limits:
1. For reinforced concrete,

0.2% if made with OPC.
2. For mass concrete,

0.6% if made with OPC or MSRPC.
3. 0.15% if made with SRPC.
C. The Contractor shall test the constituents of the concrete to establish these contents as provided for elsewhere
in this Specification.
D. In addition, regular tests to BS 1881-124:1988 for chloride content shall be made on the hardened concrete. The
following values are acceptable:
1. For reinforced concrete made with OPC:

a. 95% of the test results less than 0.18% Cl ion by weight of cement and no result greater than 0.20% Cl
ion by weight of cement.
2. For mass concrete made with OPC or MSRPC:

a. 95% of the test results less than 0.5% Cl ion by weight of cement, and no result greater than 0.6% Cl
3. For mass concrete made with SRPC:

a. 95% of the test results less than 0.1% Cl ion by weight of cement and no result greater than 0.12% Cl
1). In the event that the SRPC used contains a proportion by weight of tri-calcium aluminate which
approaches that required MSRPC (4-8%), then acceptance may be sought for an appropriate
adjustment of the relevant chloride content limits.
2). The total estimated sulphate content (SO3) of the mix including that present in the cement
shall not exceed 3.5% by weight of cement in the mix.
3). In addition, regular tests to BS 1881-124:1988 shall be made on the hardened concrete to de-
termine the total sulphate content, which shall not exceed 4% by weight of cement in the mix.
4). The permissible level of chlorides and sulphates quoted in the above clauses shall not be con-
sidered as mean values for the whole of the works, but shall apply to any concrete.
Page: 18 of 40
PART 8 MIX DESIGN & TRIAL MIXES

MIX DESIGN
A. All concrete shall conform to the requirements of this Specification, to BS EN 206-1:2000 + Amendments,
whichever is the more onerous.
B. Mixes for the required classes of concrete shall be designed by the Contractor and he shall, at least 35 days
before the commencement of concreting, have three trial batches prepared for each mix in a manner accepted
by the Engineer and tested in accordance with BS 1881, using a minimum of six cube samples per batch on three
separate days.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the mix design for each type of concrete specified for the Work.
D. The Contractor shall submit a design proposal for each type of concrete to the Engineer for acceptance before
arranging for Trial Mix. The Contractor shall obtain acceptance of all ingredient materials included in the
concrete mix with the proposed Mix Design.
E. The proposed mix design submittal shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Target parameters for strength, (including estimated standard deviation)
2. Target parameter for durability
3. Weight and density of all materials
4. Grading for each type of aggregates
5. Grading for the combined aggregates
6. Calculation of fine materials
7. Calculation of free water/cement ratio
8. Calculation of content of alkalis
9. Calculation of content of chlorides
10. Calculation of content of sulphates
11. Estimation of air content
12. Estimation of characteristic strength
13. Estimation of workability for various applications
14. Carbon foot print details
F. The concrete mixes shall be designed with a particular grading of the combined aggregates requiring a minimum
of water to create workability and creating a homogenous concrete with a high density.
G. Contractor shall notify the Engineer if there is a change in the source of materials and or Concrete Supplier.
Under no circumstances Contractor/ Concrete Supplier shall be allowed to alter the accepted Mix Design
without written acceptance of the Engineer. Mix Design accepted after the Trial Mix with a Concrete Supplier
shall not be deemed as accepted for another Supplier without conducting Trial Mix again.
H. Characteristic strength is specified by means of compressive strength. Compliance with the characteristic
strength shall be assumed if:
1. The average strength determined from any group of four consecutive test results exceeds the specified
characteristic strength by 3.0N/mm2, and
2. The strength determined from any test result is not less than the specified characteristic strength minus
3.0N/mm2.
Page: 19 of 40
PART 9 TRIAL MIX
A. Trial mixes shall be arranged by the Contractor to demonstrate that the proposed Mix Design for all
types of concrete mixes meets the design requirements.
B. The tests shall include determination of the following properties.
1. Bleeding expressed as volume of bleeding water per exposed surface area of concrete shall not exceed
0.5% in accordance with ASTM C232 – calculation 7.1 (non- vibrating)
2. Accumulated bleeding expressed as percentage of the net mixing water contained within the test shall not
exceed 3 % in accordance with ASTM C232 – calculation 7.2
3. Drying Shrinkage BS EN 1367-4:1998
4. Air content BS EN 12350-7:2000
5. Workability BS EN 12350-2, 3 & 4 :2000
6. Density of fresh and hardened concrete BS EN 12350-6 & 7:2000
7. Compressive strength BS EN 12390-2:2000
8. Tensile Strengths BS EN 12390-5:2000
9. Water Permeability as per DIN 1048
10. Water Absorption BS EN 12350
11. Initial Surface Absorption BS EN 12350
12. Chloride Permeability to AASHTO T277
13. Chloride and Sulphate levels as per BS EN 12350
C. Three trial mixes shall be made for each type of concrete mix using the same plant, equipment, batching and
transport methods intended for use in the works.
D. The requirement of compressive strength shall be verified by taking six 150mm cubes from each of the three
mixes. The test cubes shall be prepared and cured in accordance with BS EN 12350-1:2000. Three cubes shall be
tested after 7 days of maturity and three after 28 days of maturity. For concrete with PFA and GGBS, additional
sets of 2 cubes per batch shall be taken for testing at 56 days.
E. The results of the test of compressive strength for the trial mix shall be accepted, if the individual 28 days cube
strengths for each test cube exceed the specified characteristic strength by at least 4 MPa, and if the average
compressive strength of nine cubes tested at 28 days exceeds the specified characteristic strength by at least 10
MPa.
F. No concrete shall be used for the Works until the mix has been accepted in writing by the Engineer. Acceptance
by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of maintaining the required quality.
G. If required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall perform practical tests to be made on the site by filling trial
moulds to confirm the suitability of the mix for the works. The actual conditions shall be simulated for the tests.
This exercise shall be carried out at no extra cost.
H. Arrangements shall be made to measure heat of hydration for the concrete mix intended to be used for the
mass concrete works and high strength concrete. Concrete shall be placed in insulated concrete forms of
appropriate size simulating the actual concrete member or as agreed with Engineer. Temperature loggers shall
be placed at various positions (refer Part 16, Deep Section and Large Volume Pours for minimum requirements
of thermal logger positions) clause to monitor the concrete temperatures for a minimum period of 7 days.
I. A full set of tests shall be performed on the ingredients collected from the Plants during the trial mix for all
chemical, physical and petrography properties in an accepted Independent Laboratory. The results of these tests
Page: 20 of 40
shall form the bench mark for the tests carried out in the future. Grading curves for aggregates must be
submitted for these materials for comparison in the future.
J. All costs connected with laboratory tests, trial mixes, mix design and practical tests shall be included in the
Contractor’s price for the works
K. Further trial mixes shall be made if the range (the maximum minus the minimum of the three cube results in any
batch) exceeds 15% of the average of that batch, or if the range of the three batch averages exceeds 20% of the
overall average of the batches.
PART 10 WATER CEMENT RATIO
A. The free water-cement ratio shall be kept at all times as low as possible consistent with the proper hydration of
the cement and efficient workability of the concrete. The free water cement ratio shall take into account the
moisture content of the sand and coarse aggregate, and shall be strictly adhered to.
PART 11 DRYING SHRINKAGE
A. All trial mixes shall be tested for drying shrinkage to be carried out on the proposed concrete mix design in
accordance with BS 812-120 1989 or BS ISO 1920-8:2009 - Determination of changes in length on drying and
wetting. The initial drying shrinkage shall not exceed 0.05%.
Page: 21 of 40
PART 12 TESTS ON CONCRETE
12.1 GENERAL
A. Concrete test cubes shall be made, cured and tested and the results recorded in accordance with the
recommendations of BS EN ISO 7500-1:1999. The test specimens shall be 150mm cubes made in steel moulds of
accepted design. At least nine cube moulds shall be kept on the site and specimens shall be made and cured by
the Contractor as the Engineer may require.
12.2 SAMPLING
A. The frequency and rate of sampling shall be as per the following table (subject to one set of cubes from each
pour of batched concrete whichever is greater for strength tests).
Type of Structure Sampling by Volume of Concrete (m³)

Cube Strength Tests Durability Tests
All vertical Elements (Columns and walls excluding external basement
15 50
walls)
Raft foundation including pile caps and external basement walls. 30 500
All other elements 30 250
The rate of sampling shall be as per the following table:
CONCRETE GRADE RATE OF SAMPLING CUBE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

DURABILITY TEST
7D 28 D Spare
C 25/20 Blinding One set of 4 cubes for
2 2 - -
50m3
Raft/ Pile Caps Strength Tests 2 2 2 -
Durability Tests - - - 12
Slabs/ Beams and all other Strength Tests 2 2 2 -
elements
Columns/ Walls Strength Tests 2 2 2
1. Number of cubes required for durability test to be confirmed with independent laboratory.
2. Contractor at his own discretion shall take additional cubes for testing on 3rd day, 14 days or others to suit
his working method.
3. Spare cubes to be retained and protected.
4. Permeability, Water Absorption, Initial Surface Absorption, RCP, Chloride, Sulphate content tests are to be
carried out for durability testing.
5. Additional cubes for PT slabs to be taken to assess the cube strength before stressing.
Page: 22 of 40
12.3 STRENGTH TESTING
A. Cubes shall be tested in an automatic testing machine of accepted design. The cube testing machine shall be
housed in an accepted laboratory and calibrated to BS EN ISO 7500-1:1999 .The calibration shall be verified at 3
monthly minimum intervals in accordance with The Cement and Concrete Association publication "The
Comparative Cube Test" by P. Foote, 1974. Site testing of cubes may be permitted by the Engineer subject to
prior written acceptance of the facilities.
B. For each sample taken, 2 cubes shall be tested at 7 days and a further two shall be tested at 28 days. The
remaining two cubes shall be retained and protected in an undamaged condition until their testing or disposal is
requested by the Engineer. Site storage of cubes will only be permitted if facilities are available to store cubes
under the conditions and temperatures specified in BS 1881 or latest BS EN codes.
C. The test results shall be interpreted in accordance with BS EN 206-1:2000 and all other relevant codes and
standards. The Contractor and the concrete supplier shall provide a method statement prior to commencement
of the works to confirm compliance criteria of all cube tests in accordance with this specification. This shall be
subject to acceptance of the Engineer.
D. Results of all tests shall be kept on site and copies shall be sent to the Engineer as soon as results become
available but in any case not more than 24 hours after the completion of the test. All records of cube tests shall
indicate clearly which part of the structure each sample represents.
E. Cube results for 28 day values will be deemed to have failed if the following criteria are not met:
1. The average strength determined from any group of four consecutive test results shall exceed the specified
2
characteristic strength by 3.0N/mm . The strength determined from any one test result shall not be less
2
than the specified characteristic strength minus 3.0N/mm . A test result shall be the average of the two 28
day cube test results from the same sample. Also refer to section L for calculating the characteristic
strength if there is a large variation in 28 day cube strength.
F. When the results of the 7 day tests are unsatisfactory, the Contractor may elect to remove and replace the
defective concrete without waiting for the 28 day tests. If the results of the 28-day tests are unsatisfactory, all
concreting shall be stopped and shall not proceed further without the written permission of the Engineer.
G. The Contractor shall then, in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer, remove cores and test same or
conduct in-situ load tests in accordance with Concrete Society Technical report 11 including addendum: 1987
BS EN 12504-1 2009, BS EN 13791 2007 and BS 6089 1981, on all suspect portions of the works, decided by the
Engineer and under the supervision of the Engineer. Concrete judged by the Engineer to be defective shall be
forthwith cut out, removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
H. Test Reports: 2 copies of reports to be dispatched to the Engineer within one day of completion of each test. A
complete set of test reports to be kept on site.
I. Cube Test Reports must include at least the following:
1. Test laboratory and name of person responsible
2. Title of project
3. Identification mark or number
4. Certificate of sampling
5. Certificate of method of making cubes
6. Curing place and conditions
7. Date of receipt by laboratory
8. Condition on receipt by laboratory
Page: 23 of 40
9. Actual or checked nominal dimensions
10. Weight and density
11. Date of test
12. Age when tested
13. Confirmation of testing to BS 1881
14. Load at failure

a. Compressive strength
b. Type of fracture
c. Date of dispatch of report to The Engineer
J. In addition, the Contractor shall provide weekly reports to include graphical display of 7 day and 28 day test
results, and also a graphical display of average of 4 consecutive 28 day test results. Non-compliant test results
shall be clearly indicated.
K. Keep separately the pieces of each cube which fails to meet the compliance requirements for individual results.
Obtain agreement of the Engineer before discarding.
L. The Contractor shall submit a record of standard deviation for concrete strengths, and the calculated
characteristic strength applying standard deviation (of min 3) for a minimum sample size of 35. In case of large
variations in cube strengths (standard deviation exceeding 4), the character strength of supplied concrete shall
be derived from the formula as follows.
Characteristic strength = Average cube strength for n cubes minus 1.64*SD(0.86+sqrt(2/n))
n = number of cubes considered for standard deviation
SD = standard deviation subject to a minimum value of 4
M. The Contractor shall allow for taking additional cores from site for conducting durability tests if required by the
Engineer
12.4 DURABILITY TESTING
A. The durability test limits for the concrete in the piles, pile-caps, raft foundations (incl. lift pits), basement walls
and all other substructure elements shall comply with the following table:
Test Standard Requirements
Water permeability DIN 1048 ≤ 8.0mm at 28 days

Water Absorption BS 1881: Part 122 ≤ 1.5% at 28 days
Initial Surface Absorption BS 1881: Part 5 ≤ 0.15ml/m²/sec
Rapid Chloride Penetration (RCP) ASTM C1202 ≤ 1200 Coulombs at 28 days
B. For all other concrete elements including super structure elements the test limits shall comply with the
following requirements
Test Standard Requirements
Water permeability DIN 1048 ≤ 15mm at 28 days
Page: 24 of 40
Water Absorption BS 1881: Part 122 ≤ 2.5% at 28 days

Initial Surface Absorption BS 1881: Part 5 ≤ 0.3ml/m²/sec
Rapid Chloride Penetration (RCP) ASTM C1202 ≤ 2000 Coulombs at 28 days
C. Results of all tests shall be kept on site and copies shall be sent to the Engineer as soon as results become
available but in any case not more than 24 hours after the completion of the test. All records of tests shall
indicate clearly which part of the structure each sample represents.
D. If any sample does not meet the durability criteria set out above, all concreting shall be stopped and shall not
proceed further without the written permission of the Engineer.
E. The first three samples of concrete for each structural element are to be conducted twice with one set cured on
site under site conditions and the other cured at the laboratory under simulated site conditions.
PART 13 PREPARATION FOR CONCRETE WORKS
A. Locations of construction joints, shrinkage strips, pouring sequences etc. shall be planned and agreed with the
Engineer. Shrinkage strips must be designed by the Contractor
B. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer in writing 48 hours before commencement of concreting works giving
complete details of the works. The Contractor shall not commence the works without written acceptance from
the Engineer for formwork, reinforcement, arrangements for plant and materials on site, installation of
accessories, etc. Any concrete placed before obtaining such acceptance shall be rejected.
C. The Contractor shall also make suitable arrangements for the inspections by the engineers of Local Authorities.
No claim shall be entertained for time or cost of complying with local authority regulations/ inspection
requirements.
D. Cutting and chasing of hardened concrete shall not be permitted without Engineer’s acceptance. The Contractor
shall provide openings, mortises, chases, sleeves, etc., and fix bolts, anchors, etc. in concrete as work proceeds
and support embedded items against replacement. Items cast shall be filled with readily removable materials to
prevent concrete ingress.
PART 14 READY MIXED CONCRETE
14.1 GENERAL
A. Ready mixed concrete shall be used subject to the acceptance of the Engineer.
B. Ready mixed concrete shall comply in all respects with the requirement of this Specification, the requirements
of BS 8500-1, BS 8500-2, BS EN 206-1 and with the British Ready Mixed Concrete Association Specification May
1975 whichever is the most onerous.
14.2 SUPPLIER
A. Each source of ready mixed concrete is subject to the acceptance of the Engineer which may be withdrawn at
any time. Only ready mix supplier with ISO 9001 registration shall be considered
B. The contractor and ready mix suppliers shall give assistance to the Engineer in inspecting the ready mix plant
and equipment, including access to all area of the plant, providing copies of past material tests and cube results,
and any other information the Engineer may request. Materials shall be tested at Contractor's expense in
independent accredited testing laboratory and as required by other clauses of this Specification.
Page: 25 of 40
C. No site mixing shall be allowed for structural concrete. No addition of water/ admixture shall be allowed
D. Special considerations must be given when concrete replacement binders such as micro silica, PFA etc. are used.
The sequence and time when these are to be added to the mixing drum must be as advised by the
manufacturer. Mixing time may have to be increased for these concretes
14.3 DELIVERY
A. Before discharging the concrete at the point of delivery the supplier shall produce a delivery ticket for each
batch of concrete which states the following minimum information:
1. Name or number of ready-mixed concrete depot
2. Serial Number of ticket
3. Date
4. Truck number
5. Name of purchaser
6. Name and location of site (grid reference, member reference, layer numbers, etc.)
7. Grade of mix description of concrete
8. Specified workability
9. Type of cement
10. Nominal maximum size of aggregate
11. Type & quantity of any admixtures
12. Quantity of concrete in cubic metres
13. Time of loading
B. The time of loading is defined as the time of contact between cement & aggregate or, when these are surface
dry, the time of contact between cement and added water.
C. Space should also be provided on the ticket for the following to be added on site:
1. Arrival and departure times of the truck
2. Time of completion of discharge
D. Particular attention shall be paid to the fresh concrete temperature requirements of the specification and all
necessary action taken to ensure that the concrete remains within the temperature specification.
E. Truck type concrete mixers shall comply with the requirements of BS 4251. They shall also be subject to the
acceptance of the Engineer who may require that shaded truck mixers be used.
14.4 TRANSPORTING
A. The concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the point of placement as rapidly as practicable by methods
that will maintain the required workability and will prevent segregation, loss of any constituents or ingress of
foreign matter or water. The concrete shall be deposited as close as practicable to its final position to avoid re-
handling or moving the concrete horizontally by vibration.
14.5 PLACING AND COMPACTING
A. A minimum of 48 hours’ notice shall be given in writing of the intention to place concrete.
B. Concrete shall be discharged and placed in its final position in the form within ninety (90) minutes of time of
loading defined in clause 12.3.B above. Concrete that has exceeded this period or has stiffened to an
Page: 26 of 40
unacceptable slump within this period shall not be used in the permanent works. The Engineer's decision on the
acceptability of fresh concrete shall be final. Under no circumstances addition of extra water or admixture after
the initial batching shall be permitted. Concrete that has, in the Engineer's opinion, had additional water added
will be rejected.
C. After placing, the concrete shall be vibrated into position in layers not exceeding 400mm in thickness using
accepted mechanical vibration except for concrete placed in the piles, which is the responsibility of the piling
contractor.
D. Concrete shall not be placed in water, except as specified.

o o
E. Concreting shall not take place in ambient shade temperatures exceeding 110 F/43 C. When the ambient shade
o
temperature exceeds 35 C formwork and reinforcement shall be kept shaded before and during concreting. The
Contractor shall maintain on site a calibrated maximum and minimum thermometer housed in an accepted
Stevenson screen.
F. Concrete shall not be placed in any part of the structure until the formwork and reinforcement have been
inspected and accepted by the Engineer. Formwork is to be thoroughly cleaned of all tying wire, nails and
foreign matter prior to inspection by the Engineer.
G. Concrete shall only be placed after the Engineer has examined and accepted the positioning, fixing and
condition of the reinforcement and any other items to be embedded, and the cleanliness, alignment and
suitability of the containing surfaces.
H. The concrete shall be placed in the position and sequences shown on the drawings and then deposited as near
as possible to its final position in such a manner as to avoid segregation of the concrete, or displacement of the
reinforcement or formwork. It shall be further deposited in regular courses or layers not exceeding 400 mm
thickness when mechanically compacted, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
I. The Contractor shall so organize his work that the placing of concrete is efficient and continuous between
specified or accepted construction joints. When an interruption in concrete supply is anticipated, the placed
concrete must be properly vibrated, all loose concrete/ aggregates must be cleaned off immediately. When
vertical lifts of concrete are interrupted or delayed for more than 30 minutes, provided that the concrete has
still retained a reasonable workability as determined by the Engineer, the surface of the unfinished concrete
shall be thoroughly cleaned and washed with cement grout immediately before fresh concrete is added. The
first layer of new concrete placed shall not exceed 150mm in depth and particular care shall be taken with
compaction of this layer to ensure a good bond. With vertical sections the unfinished concrete shall be finished
off with a clean surface and left for 24 hours to set before any further concrete is placed.
J. The surface shall then be thoroughly cleaned of all loose and foreign matter and laitance which may necessitate
the temporary removal of the formwork before placing the remaining concrete.
K. Concrete shall not be allowed to drop freely for more than 2.0m. To convey the concrete as near as possible to
its final position, drop chutes of rubber or metal shall be used for small sections and bottom dump buckets or
other suitable vessels for large sections.
L. Laying of thin sections (such as floor slabs) in two courses shall not be permitted except where specified or
ordered by the Engineer.
M. Reinforced concrete must not be placed directly upon the ground. Where blinding concrete is used as a base it
shall be of grade C25 mix laid over the ground to provide a clean working surface.
N. Concrete shall be compacted during placing by accepted internal vibrators. The vibrators shall operate at a
frequency of not less than 10,000 cycles per minute, and shall be designed for continuous operation. The
performance of vibrators shall suit the working conditions, and they shall generally not be less than 75mm
diameter. The radius of influence shall ensure that the mass under treatment is compacted at a speed
commensurate with the rate of supply of concrete.
Page: 27 of 40
O. Except the case of properly formed construction joints, concrete shall not be allowed to have obtained its initial
set before additional concrete added. The ability of a standard 75mm internal vibrator to cause the concrete to
flow will be used as a criterion for acceptance but the Engineer's decision will be final.
P. Concrete shall not be subject to any form of external vibration between 2 hours and 24 hours after placing. No
mechanical work to recently placed concrete such as scabbing will be permitted until 36 hours after placing of
fresh concrete, unless agreed otherwise by the Engineer.
Q. No concreting shall be carried out in rain. The remixing or re-tempering of stiffened concrete is not permitted.
R. The Engineer will reject any concrete which he considers to have been inadequately mixed, or in which the
ingredients have segregated, or which is no longer capable of being effectively placed or compacted.
S. Separate method of placing and compacting shall be agreed with the Engineer for special concretes (free flow/
self-compacting concrete), special applications (deep lift/ mass concrete, transfer walls etc), and special
methods (e.g. slip form or jump form systems).
T. The Contractor shall investigate for the plastic settlement and cracks within the first few hours of placing the
concrete and rectify the same by appropriate method.
U. Within 48 hours of concreting operation, the Contractor shall carry out a detailed alignment check including
flatness/ surface regularity, departure from datum, horizontal and vertical alignments for vertical members,
squareness of members, etc. complete and submit the post pour check for acceptance. The Contractor shall
amend his method of construction at no extra cost and time if the post-pour check in the opinion of the
Engineer indicates large scale deviations attributable to method of construction.
V. Deliverables for Concrete Works
1. Delivery Certificates: The Contractor shall submit the delivery certificates within 24 hours of the placing of
concrete.
2. Pouring Log: The Contractor shall submit the pouring log within 24 hours of placing the concrete along with
the delivery certificate. The pouring log should indicate the delivery ticket number, batching and placing
times, truck numbers, location of placing (member/ layer number/ grid ref), slump and temperature (and
any other fresh concrete test results), cubes taken etc complete.
3. Test Certificates: Submit all the strength and durability test certificates within 3 days of actual test dates.
Contractor shall maintain a cube register for strength and durability tests and submit the summary every
week. Standard deviation of the strength tests shall be carried out once a reasonable sample size
(minimum 35) is available.
4. Ingredient Test reports: The Contractor as a minimum shall compile and submit the concrete ingredient
test reports for the concrete ingredients tested both in the concrete plant as well as Independent
laboratory in the first week of every month for the preceding month. If the change of ingredient resources
has taken place then additional tests may be carried out at no additional cost.
5. Calibration certificates for all testing equipment, at intervals indicated in standards.
Page: 28 of 40
PART 15 FRESH CONCRETE TEMPERATURE

o o
A. The maximum temperature of wet and unset concrete is to be limited to 30 C (86 F) at all times to prevent
excessively rapid setting times, loss of moisture and shrinkage, etc. However, if the fresh concrete temperature
used at trial mix stage in hot box testing to demonstrate the compliance with the heat of hydration
0
requirements (ref section on Deep Sections and Large Volume Pours) is lower than 30 C, the same shall be used
for large volume or thick sections, unless agreed otherwise by the Engineer.
B. The following precautions should be adopted as necessary to comply with the above limits: -
1. Shading of aggregate stock piles
2. Insulation of water tanks, pipelines and formwork
3. Refrigeration of mixing water
4. Addition of ice to mix to lower temperature
5. Shading of formwork and reinforcement prior to casting and protection from drying winds
6. Cooling of formwork and reinforcement prior to and ahead of the concrete by mist spraying
7. Covering and spraying with water of hardening concrete surfaces
8. Concreting during the cooler parts of the day
9. Use of shaded ready mixed trucks
C. The Contractor shall refer to ACI standard 305R-99 and CIRIA C577 for Recommended Practice for Hot Weather
Concreting.
D. Should the maximum concrete temperature be exceeded concreting should be ceased immediately and not
resumed until the requirements can be met again. Additional precautions shall be taken to avoid the concrete
exceeding the specified temperature on future pours.
PART 16 TESTS ON FRESH CONCRETE
A. The Contractor shall at all times maintain on site a calibrated concrete thermometer, flow table/ cone, slump
cone/ tamping rod to BS 1881. The temperature of each batch of concrete shall be taken and recorded. Slump/
flow tests shall be taken as required but with emphasis on initial batches to regulate the amount of water used
in batching. Concrete with an unacceptable temperature or slump/ flow will be rejected. For high slump
concrete (slump above 175mm), flow test using flow table shall be used in addition to slump test.
B. The Contractor shall pay for maintaining all testing equipment on site in a proper working order to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and shall be deemed to have included in his rates for all tests required in any clause
of this specification. The Contractor shall not be paid for any special tests called for by the Engineer in
consequences of any failure by the Contractor to comply with this specification or for any additional tests whose
results fall outside the limits deemed acceptable by the Engineer.
C. TESTS ON SELF COMPACTING CONCRETE
1. Tests on fresh concrete detailed in previous section are not applicable for self-compacting concrete. For
self-compacting concrete, following tests shall be performed
Tests Reference Requirements

Slump Flow Test BS EN 12350- 1. Slump Flow (SF) to nearest 10mm: min
Frequency: every batch 8:2010 450mm; Max 760mm.
Page: 29 of 40
2. t50 time, to nearest 0.50 secs: ≥2 sec and ≤5

sec
3. Difference between concrete flow for two
consecutive tests – max 50mm
4. No segregation
V-Funnel Test BS EN 12350- 1. V-funnel flow time to nearest 0.50 secs: min6sec
Frequency: Trail mix stage or at change of 9:2010 max12sec
source of concrete ingredients. 2. No second time blockage
L-Box Test BS EN 12350- 1. Passing Ability Ratio PL (h2/h1) = 0.8-1.0
Frequency: Trail mix stage or at change of 10:2010
source of concrete ingredients.
Sieve Segregation Test BS EN 12350- 1. Sieve Segregation Raio: Min/max: 0%- 15%
Frequency: Trail mix stage or at change of 11:2010
source of concrete ingredients.
J-Ring Test BS EN 12350- 1. Passing Ability, PJ value: min/ max: 0-10 mm
Frequency: Trail mix stage or at change of 12:2010 2. Flow Spread SFJ :450mm-760mm
source of concrete ingredients. 3. t50J time, to nearest 0.50 secs: ≥2 sec and
≤5sec
16.2 DEEP SECTIONS AND LARGE VOLUME POURS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure all necessary precautions are taken when casting deep sections
and large volume pours. Guidance from CIRIA report #135 Concreting Deep Lifts and Large Volume Pours shall
be followed, subject to acceptance of Method Statement by Engineer.
B. Prior to a large volume pour a pre-pour meeting shall be organized by the Contractor to discuss and agree the
implementation of the necessary measures as discussed below.
C. A proposal considering special precautions for curing to prevent early age cracking shall be submitted by the
Contractor to the Engineer. These shall consider as a minimum the following:
1. Temperature differentials across sections
2. Coefficient of thermal expansion
3. Strain capacity of the concrete mix (aggregate dependant)
4. The effect of restraint on the slab
D. The proposal is to be submitted to the Engineer with sufficient time to review and make any necessary
recommendations. The concrete pour is not to be commenced until this proposal has been reviewed to the
Engineers satisfaction.
Cross sections greater than or equal to 1000mm shall be considered as deep sections and appropriate measures
taken to limit the heat of hydration and temperature gradients to comply with section F below.
E. Examples of these measures may include but not necessarily be limited to:
1. Controlling fresh concrete temperature
2. Control of concrete mix constituents
3. Curing water with chilled water circulation inside concrete body
4. Formwork type
Page: 30 of 40
5. Surface insulation
6. Nitrogen injection
7. Shading of ingredients and concrete trucks
F. All proposals are to be based on the measured values of the heat of hydration generated by the proposed mix to
meet the performance criteria listed below:
1. Maximum temperature difference between the core and the surface of any pour shall be: Design value =
o o
15 C, Maximum measured value = 20 C
2. Maximum temperature difference between a new pour and a previous pour shall be:
o o
3. Design value = 12 C, Maximum measured value = 15 C
4. Absolute maximum temperature anywhere in a pour:

o o
5. Design value = 60 C, Maximum measured value = 70 C
G. An independent accredited laboratory accepted by the Consultant shall be appointed by the Contractor to
install, monitor and report the temperature affects as specified in this specification. Submit to the Engineer for
acceptance details of the proposed methods and equipment for measuring and logging of temperatures. Automatic
temperature logging system shall be used.
H. Instrumentation shall be installed within the concrete pour to verify compliance with the above criteria.
Temperature measurements shall be made by means of thermocouples positioned in a line perpendicular to the
concrete faces. One set of thermocouple installation shall consist of thermocouple loggers located at every
300mm centres across the depth of the concrete member. The locations of installation of thermocouples shall
be as agreed and accepted by the Engineer. As a minimum, one set of thermocouples shall be located at the
mid-section, one set near the face and one set near the external corner of the concrete element. In addition,
one logger shall be installed to record ambient temperature.
I. Temperatures shall be measured and logged continuously from the start of the pour until instructed to stop by
the Engineer. As a minimum, the readings shall be recorded for seven days at an hourly interval.
J. Concrete must be covered with polystyrene insulation boards of appropriate thickness to prevent heat loss
resulting in increased temperature gradient. The Contractor may increase the number of polystyrene sheet
layers if the temperature gradient shoots beyond the acceptable limits. The Contractor shall ensure that the
concrete is not exposed to “thermal shock” by removing the polystyrene boards arbitrarily. The surface must be
cured with curing membrane and covered with polythene sheet if this method is used as water curing might
cool the surface and increase thermal gradient.
K. If instructed by the Engineer, formwork for vertical elements/ vertical faces shall not be removed until the core
0
temperature is reduced to a level which is 20 C higher than ambient temperature and the form work must be
covered with insulation boards at no extra cost/ time.
L. The Contractor shall conduct appropriate and accepted destructive and non-destructive tests should the
temperature gradient and core temperature exceeds the tolerances specified above.
M. If the temperature measurements exceed any of the criteria indicated in item F above, action shall be taken by
the Contractor, at the discretion of the Engineer which may range from qualified acceptance to rejection and
removal of all or part of the affected part of the Works at no additional cost and time.
N. Maximum pour sizes unless otherwise indicated in the drawings or accepted by the Engineer shall be as shown
in the following table:
Construction Maximum Area (square Maximum Dimension (m)

metres)
Water-resisting walls 25 5
Page: 31 of 40
Water-resisting slabs 100 10

Slabs with Major restraint at both ends 100 13
Slabs with Major restraint at one end only 250 20
Slabs with little restraint in any direction 500 30
Walls 40 10
Table 1. Maximum Pour Sizes
PART 17 CURING
17.1 GENERAL
A. Freshly placed concrete shall be protected from rain, dust storms, chemical attack, and the harmful effects of
heat, wind, flowing water, vibrations and shocks. This protection shall continue until the concrete is sufficiently
set such that it is no longer damaged by these factors. The Engineer shall determine when the protection is no
longer required, but in any case this shall not be less than 24 hours after the time of placing.
17.2 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Immediately after compaction and for 7 days thereafter all concrete shall be protected against harmful effects
of sunshine, drying winds, rain or running water to the satisfaction of the Engineer. During this period the
measures given in Clauses on “Curing of Horizontal Surface” and “Curing of Vertical Surface” shall be taken to
prevent the loss of moisture from the concrete and to minimize thermal stresses caused by the difference in
temperature between the surface of the concrete and the core of the concrete mass. No methods shall be
employed without the Engineer's acceptance.
B. Air circulation shall be prevented as far as possible along the exposed faces of concrete during the curing period.
C. Joints which have to be filled with sealing compound, or surfaces formed as construction joints, are to be
protected in a manner which will ensure that no curing compound is placed on the bonding surface and
adjacent concrete and is to remain in place until the joint surface is sealed or for the periods specified.
D. The surfaces of the concrete shall be protected from contamination of any sort for a period of not less than 30
days from the date of pouring.
E. Where curing compounds are used they shall be compatible with waterproofing or other finishing that may
subsequently be applied to the surface of the concrete. The Contractor shall remove the curing compound
completely before applying finishing if the membrane and subsequent applications are incompatible. Where the
scope of finishing is not in the scope of the Contractor, responsible for concreting, curing compound shall be
removed by the concreting contractor after the curing period is over.
17.3 CURING COMPOUND
A. The liquid for the curing of concrete surfaces shall be a white pigmented compound complying with ASTM C
309-07, which when applied at the rate of spread specified by the manufacturer, has a minimum curing
efficiency of 90%, as determined by the test method given in ASTM C 156-09a and Equation 1 below. The liquid
shall not react chemically with the concrete. It is to contain flake aluminum in finely divided dispersion which
will not separate out when the compound is applied as specified.
B. In principle curing compound shall be sprayed when the concrete is wet. For vertical surfaces where the
formwork is stripped after more than 24 hours of pouring pre wetting of concrete shall be done before applying
the curing compound.
Page: 32 of 40
C. After application the liquid shall produce a continuous film of uniform thickness with an unbroken finish, free
from pin-holes or other imperfections, over the entire surface of the concrete. The film shall be touch-dry within
5 minutes and stable within 60 minutes, and shall not disintegrate for 3 weeks.
D. At least 2 weeks before the compound is required the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a 5-litre
sample together with a certificate from an independent laboratory reporting the results of tests carried out by
the laboratory on the product within the previous six months. The compound shall not be used until
acceptance has been given by the Engineer.
E. Each consignment delivered to the site shall be clearly marked by the manufacturer with his name and that of
the product, and shall be accompanied by a certificate stating that the consignment is equal to the sample
tested and giving the rate of spread required for the specified efficiency. The delivery certificates are to be
passed to the Engineer for his retention.
F. The compound shall not be harmful to those handling it and shall be proof against fire risk and explosive hazard.
G. The Efficiency Index (E) shall be calculated as follows:
1. E = 100 x (W - W1) / W (Equation 1)
2. where W = the average of the moisture losses of 3 control specimens expressed as a percentage of the
original mass of water in the specimens
3. where W1 =the average of the moisture losses (assessed after correction for volatile losses) of the 3 test
specimens expressed as a percentage of the original mass of water in the specimens
17.4 CURING OF HORIZONTAL SURFACES
A. Immediately after the completion of compacting and levelling, the surface should be covered with clean plastic
sheeting, such as polythene sheeting and kept in contact with the concrete. If there is any delay between
placing and finishing, then the surface should be covered in the intervening period. After initial set has taken
place, the plastic sheeting should be removed and the surface should be covered with wet hessian. The plastic
sheeting may then be replaced over the hessian. The hessian should be kept in a damp condition for at least 7
days by frequent application of water. At the end of the initial wet curing period, the plastic sheeting and the
hessian may be removed and an accepted pigmented resin based curing compound may be applied over the
surface.
B. Alternatively, the surface may be cured by other accepted curing methods or by the application of accepted
curing compounds on the surface in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. However, in case the
application of such curing compounds is delayed for any reason, the concrete should be kept moist until the
application is made.
C. The above curing procedure must be read in conjunction with Part 16, Deep Sections and Large Volume pours,
which focuses on limiting temperature gradients.
D. Minimum curing period shall be 7 days from the completion time of concrete works for the particular member
to be cured. The Contractor shall ensure the curing of slab soffits for 7 days if early striking of formwork is
permitted
17.5 CURING OF VERTICAL SURFACES
A. As soon as practicable, the side shutters may be eased off and the curing water from the top surface is allowed
to trickle down the sides. Immediately after stripping, proprietary accepted white pigmented resin based curing
compound shall be applied. The above curing procedure must be read in conjunction with Part 16, Deep
Sections and Large Volume pours, which focuses on limiting temperature gradients
B. Timber formwork covering the concrete shall be moistened with water at frequent intervals to prevent it from
drying during the curing period. Metal formwork exposed to sun must be shaded from its direct rays, painted
white or otherwise protected during the curing period.
Page: 33 of 40
17.6 CURING OF ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
A. Fair faced Architectural walls shall be cured/ protected with an accepted method demonstrated to be effective
during the mock up trials. The considerations for acceptance of method will include but not limited to:
1. Staining of surface due to curing water/ un even wetting/ alternate wetting and drying
2. Staining of the surface due to hessian cloth
3. Staining of the surface due to curing compound
4. Un-desirable shiny surface due to colourless curing compound
5. Staining of the surface due to exposure to UV rays
PART 18 TOLERANCES
A. Permissible deviations on in-situ concrete not to be greater than those given in BS 5606, "Guide to accuracy in
building" and BS 8204 Parts 1 to 4 as applicable, subject to the following minimum requirements
Item Permitted Deviation Comments / Specification Reference
Piling Refer to Pile Specification, SPERW and piling More onerous tolerance limits shall apply
design drawings
All setting out dimen- +/-5mm over 30m on plan relative to one
sions at ground floor datum each.
level
Position on plan general- Foundations: +/-30mm Applies to any concrete element measured at
ly Columns: +/- 5mm floor (or foundation) level.
Other elements: +/-10mm
NSCS, Part 1, Clause 7.5
Slab edges: +/-10mm Note: Foundations along plot line, shall not
project outside plot line.
Position on plan - core At base: +/-10mm Applies to centroids and surfaces of core walls
walls relative to grid.
At any other level: +/-10mm
Position on plan - open- Relative to grid: +/-10mm
ings in core walls
Relative to nearest point of reference on
core: +/-10mm
Size generally L ≤ 600mm: +/-5mm Applies to linear dimensions L of formed con-
(other than slab thick- crete elements (e.g., columns, walls, beams)
ness) 600mm < L ≤ 1.5m: +/-8mm where L is the length, height or width of the
element.
1.5m < L ≤ 8.0m: +/-10mm

NSCS, Part 1, Clause 7.2.2
8.0m < L ≤ 15m: +/-12m

For L > 15m refer to specification.
Size - core walls Plan dimensions: +/-10m
Page: 34 of 40
Wall thickness: +/-5mm

Opening height/width: +/-10mm
Twist Refer to specification NSCS, Part 1, Clause 7.3
Squareness Refer to specification NSCS, Part 1, Clause 7.4
Slab thickness - t ≤ 200mm: +/-6mm Applies to concrete slabs of thickness t, other
than slabs cast on metal decking.
200mm < t ≤ 600mm: +/-10mm NSCS, Part 1, Clause 7.2.1
600mm < t ≤ 1.0m: +/-15mm
t > 1.0m: +/-20mm

Level generally Foundations (except raft foundations form- Applies to any concrete slab, beam or founda-
(Insitu) ing basement floors): +/-15mm tion and are ‘pre-strike’ tolerances:
Other elements: -0mm. +5mm
Intersecting beams: +10mm

Surface Regularity and In-situ flooring and Direct finished base BS 8204 part 1 to 4
Departure from Datum slabs, toppings and screeds and surface to NSCS, Part 1, Clause 7.6
receive sheet or tile finishes - maximum
Variation from target plane: 15mm
Flatness: 5mm under a 3m straight edge,
2mm under a 1m straight edge
Abrupt changes across joints 2mm
Surface regularity of all residential and
non-residential slabs to receive sheet or tile
finishes:
5mm under a 3m straightedge
Surface regularity of non-residential slabs

to receive screeds/topping/beds up to
50mm thick:
Surface Regularity and Note: The tolerances noted above are not
Departure from Datum cumulative and must not exceed an overall
(contd) of +/-10mm (measured at column loca-
tions).
Level - core walls +/-15mm Applies to all elements within core walls, in-
cluding beams and openings.
Plumb/verticality gener- H/600 Applies to plumb of elements over a height H,
ally including beams or edges above each other.
Page: 35 of 40
For H > 8.0m refer to specification.

Plumb/verticality - core H/600 Represents the maximum permitted horizontal
walls displacement of centroids and surfaces of core
walls over any height H.
Straightness/bow - ele- L ≤ 1.5m: Δ = +/-5mm Applies to bow Δ measured between extremi-

ments without specified ties of elements of length L.
pre-camber 1.5m < L ≤ 3.0m: Δ = +/-8mm
3.0m < L ≤ 5.0m: Δ = +/-10mm
5.0m < L ≤ 8.0m: Δ = +/-15mm
over 8.0m Δ = +/-15mm + 1mm per

metre or part with a maximum of 25mm
Specified pre-camber Δ Δ ≤ 20mm: +/-5mm Permitted deviation to specified pre-camber -
Δ.
20mm < Δ ≤ 40mm: +/-10mm
Δ > 40mm: +/-15mm NSCS, Part 1, Clause 7.9
Straightness/bow - +/-10mm in 3.0m Applies to any surface of a core wall, measured

core walls in any direction.
Abrupt change in surface Generally: 2mm NSCS, Part 1, Clause 7.10
At construction or movement joints: 3mm
Core walls: 5mm

Cast-in fixings generally Location: +/-10mm NSCS, Part 1, Clause 7.7
Level: +/-10mm
Cast-in fixings in core Location relative to grid: +/-25mm Pull out bars and couplers are not considered
walls as cast in fixings and the tolerances of rebar
Location relative to nearest point of refer- placement shall be applicable for them.
ence on core: +/-15mm
For specialist supplied/ erected elements like
Location relative to face of wall: +0/-15mm curtain walls, PT slab etc. the more onerous
(positive outwards) tolerance between specialist’s requirements
and this document shall be applicable
Level: +/-15mm
Column holding down location on plan +/-5mm NSSS, Clause 7.11
bolts (+/-10mm for 25mm dia bolts or greater)
Stairs (structural) Vertical height of any flight between land- Refer architectural specification for tolerances
ings : +/- 10mm on finishing
Page: 36 of 40
Difference in rise of any consecutive steps:

+/- 5mm
Difference in level of tread with the going:
+/- 4mm
1. Refer to architectural specifications for tolerances in exposed concrete or other concrete elements where
specified. More onerous limits shall be applicable in case of discrepancy.
2. Where during the coordination between structural, MEP and architectural elements it is found that above
maximum tolerances cannot be achieved, the Contractor shall construct the structural elements to higher
degree of accuracy to accommodate all elements as per Contract Documents. Tolerances for lift wells shall
follow that of core walls but shall be fully coordinated with lift installation requirements.
3. Where curtain walls are to be fixed on structural concrete elements, the Contractor shall coordinate the
requirements of curtain wall fixing and slab/ beam edge tolerances and if required reduce the tolerances.
4. These tolerances are for constructed elements and not for setting out, formwork erection and other
construction stages
5. Typically the tolerances shall not be applied cumulatively. i.e. in a vertical structure, the centroid of the
vertical elements shall not be shifted by more than 10mm.
6. Minimum rebar cover shall not be compromised while applying minus tolerances
7. The Contractor shall be responsible for corrective actions required if any to lay the services affected by the
deviations from levels even though the deviations are within the tolerance limits.
8. Where finishes are not indicated in Contract Document, the Contractor shall construct the elements with
tolerances applicable for directly finished elements.
9. Level variability of beams is measured on the soffit of concrete beams but on the top of steel beams
10. Variability of surface level can be expressed in two ways

a. Variation from target plane i.e. Variability above and below the target plane, (defined with reference
to an adjacent TBM) of each of the points levelled
b. Flatness, i.e. “Flatness” of the surface, is defined as the departure from a 3 m straightedge in contact
with the floor. This value of flatness is already taken into account in 9a) above and therefore should
not be combined with variation in datum
PART 19 CONCRETE – NON CONFORMANCE AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
19.1 GENERAL
A. No repairs for defective concrete shall be carried out without written acceptance by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall propose, obtain acceptance from the Engineer and keep repair materials ready at site. Repair
materials/ methods for various types of defects such as blow holes, surface honeycombs, deep honeycombs
cracks etc. shall be separately agreed with the Engineer prior to starting the concreting job. The Engineer has no
obligation to accept a repaired Concrete Works. If the Engineer in his opinion finds that repair method or
repairing for certain elements are not acceptable and rejects the concrete elements altogether, the Contractor
shall break the same and rebuild the element at no additional time/ cost.
B. The entire repair works on the affected concrete elements shall be completed before the next operation of
concreting is carried out.
Page: 37 of 40
C. No cutting of finished concrete shall be allowed without written acceptance of the Engineer.
19.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A. All the repair materials, procedure, workmanship etc. complete shall comply with BS EN 1504, Part 1 to 10.
19.3 OUT OF TOLERANCE CONSTRUCTION
A. Where the concrete element is placed outside the tolerance limits detailed in section 18, the same shall be
rectified by the Contractor at no extra cost.
B. Where proposed rectification method involves grinding of concrete elements and the grinding thickness exceeds
5mm, rebar covers shall be checked with cover meter to ensure that the minimum cover requirements are not
compromised.
C. Only epoxy based levelling compounds shall be permitted. No feather edging of levelling compound shall be
allowed.
D. A sample shall be prepared for the rectification works
19.4 REPAIRS USING STRUCTURAL REPAIR MORTARS AND GROUTS
A. Shrinkage compensated structural repair mortars shall be used for repairing surface honeycombs. The affected
area of concrete shall be cut to a minimum depth of 10mm, edges cut with a grinder preventing feather edges.
The repair mortar shall be applied as per manufacturer’s recommendation. Curing shall be carried out for all
cementitious repair works as per manufacturer’s recommendation.
B. Where the honeycomb depth exceeds 25mm, use of repair mortars shall not be permitted. The Contractor shall
use epoxy non-shrink grout for repairing the same. All the affected concrete shall be cut and removed, edges cut
with grinder to prevent feather edges. Where rebars are exposed, concrete shall be cut to create a minimum
space of 10mm around rebars. Shrinkage compensated epoxy grouts shall be mixed and placed as per
manufacturer’s recommendations. Formwork shall be erected as per accepted method statement. For vertical
wall repairs, “post box” method of formwork shall be used.
C. Use of fair coat mortar shall be used for structurally non-significant blow holes only, with the acceptance of
Engineer.
19.5 CRACKS IN THE CONCRETE
A. The Contractor, by signing the Contract shall be deemed to have agreed to construct all the concrete elements
as per design drawings and which are devoid of any defects such as cracks. The Contractor shall include in his
Method statement the measures taken by him to prevent cracks in concrete elements. The above shall include
but not limited to:
1. Written confirmation by the Contractor through an accepted third party independent licensed Structural
Engineer that he has checked the structural design, structural details and minimum requirements of
concrete indicated in the Contract Documents by Employer and is satisfied with the same.
2. Written confirmation by the Contractor that his proposed concrete mix design has considered the issue and
the mix proportions and constituents can prevent cracking.
3. Calculation of concrete bay sizes by an accepted third party independent licensed Structural Engineer
taking in to consideration cracking
4. Proposed method of construction, sequencing, protection measures, curing measures, etc
B. Cracks wider than 200 micron shall be rectified with accepted method
C. All the cracks shall be injected with accepted epoxy resin. Filling the cracks by gravity method shall not be
permitted unless the cracks are wider than 1mm and are shallow.
Page: 38 of 40
D. The Contractor shall arrange for a detailed crack mapping by accepted, accredited independent laboratory if
instructed by the Engineer.
E. The Contractor shall arrange to take core samples and ultra-sonic testing as directed by the Engineer to assess
the extent of cracks.
F. All the above works shall be carried out by the Contractor at no additional claims for time or cost and deemed to
have been included in Contract amount.
PART 20 EMBEDDED SERVICES AND OPENINGS
A. The Contractor shall coordinate all the MEP and other embedded elements to be cast in the concrete section
ensuring that the integrity of concrete is not compromised. Congestion of electrical conduits shall not be
allowed in the concrete members and if required, the Contractor shall propose, get acceptance and reroute the
services at no additional cost and time to the Contract. All cut-outs and sleeves shall be properly coordinated
and executed. PVC coated or epoxy painted steel bars shall be used to support the sleeves/ cut-outs in position.
B. Where cut-outs in concrete elements, other than that shown on the structural drawings are required to be
provided, the Contractor shall follow the minimum procedure as set out below:
1. Prepare fully coordinated drawings showing all elements of MEP, architectural and structural features.
2. Prepare coordinated structural drawings, including plan, elevation and section, showing the specified and
newly required openings.
3. For core walls and shear walls, the wall elevation shall be drawn for the full height of the wall and cut-outs
and other features in each level shall be shown in the drawing.
C. Unless indicated otherwise, the Contractor shall provide trimmers around all the cut outs/ sleeves in concrete
members as per the typical details shown. This shall include cut outs/ sleeves in not only structural drawings but
also in architectural, MEP and other services Contract drawings/ specifications, including the drawings/
specification by specialist/ nominated sub-contractors complete.
D. Where cut outs are re-located while coordinating various elements of construction and services, the cost of
relocation and trimmers around the cut outs shall be deemed to have been included in the Contract amount.
PART 21 POST CONSTRUCTION CUTTING OF CONCRETE
A. It is recognized that some cutting of concrete elements is unavoidable in construction. This may arise because of
changes in design, missed out services, defective embedded services or changed service installation
requirements.
B. Under no circumstances the Contractor shall be allowed to cut finished concrete elements without prior
acceptance by the Engineer. A Method Statement shall be submitted for the proposal to the Engineer for the
acceptance and the works shall be carried out upon the acceptance of this Method Statement by the Engineer.
C. Following general guidelines shall be observed as minimum requirements:
1. Use a cover meter to locate the rebar, particularly in a critical element like columns & beams. Avoid cutting
rebars. Locate embedded services, waterproofing elements etc. and prepare a mark-up drawing.
Acceptance for cutting shall be granted only upon agreement on the location.
2. If the cover to rebars are compromised by the chase in concrete, apply accepted epoxy coating to concrete
and or rebars to restore the durability requirements
3. Patching shall be carried out with accepted epoxy based, shrinkage compensated repair materials as per
accepted method statement.
Page: 39 of 40
4. Horizontal chasing in a vertical element such as columns/ walls shall not be allowed. Similarly chasing
concrete in a direction perpendicular to the slab direction shall be avoided.
5. All the repair works shall comply with the requirements in part 19 as a minimum.
END OF SECTION
Page: 40 of 40
STANDARD SPECIFICATION Division 03 – Concrete
WSP | Parsons Brinckerhoff Section 031100 Concrete Forming
SECTION 031100 – CONCRETE FORMING ............................................................................................... 2

PART 1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1 SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................. 2
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS .......................................................................................................... 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................. 4
1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................ 5
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................................................. 7
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ..................................................................................... 7
PART 2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................ 9
2.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................... 9
PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................. 11
3.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 11
3.2 ACCESS ....................................................................................................................................... 12
3.3 USE OF EXPANDED METAL SHEETS FOR STOP ENDS ........................................................ 12
3.4 EXAMINATION ............................................................................................................................. 13
3.5 TOLERANCES ............................................................................................................................. 13
3.6 STRIKING ..................................................................................................................................... 14
3.7 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SLIP FORM CONCRETE ...................................................... 15
3.8 SITE QUALITY CONTROL ........................................................................................................... 20
3.9 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING ..................................................................................................... 20
Page: 1 of 20
SECTION 031100 – CONCRETE FORMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents
1. Read this work section in conjunction with other related work sections, division 01 general
requirements, the design drawings and the contract conditions.
2. Read this work Section in conjunction with the Project Specific movement and tolerances
report, if appropriate.
3. Read this work section in conjunction with architectural design drawings and specifications
to establish any special concrete formwork & finishes requirements.
B. Related Work Sections:
1. 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete

2. 032000 Concrete Reinforcing
3. 033500 Concrete Finishing
C. Work Section Includes:
1. All materials, labour, equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver, and install all
work for this section shall be provided as shown on the drawings, as specified, and as
required by job conditions, including but not limited to the following:
a. All formwork & Falsework required for cast in place concrete works.
1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Consultants Design Verification
1. It is the contractor’s responsibility to establish the Contractor’s requirements of the local

authority to obtain building permits.
2. The contractor shall make any necessary submittals and calculations as required by
governing local authority to assist in obtaining the required permits, at no additional cost to
the Employer.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. General:
1. All Building Codes, Industry Standard specifications and applicable By-Laws referred to in
the Specification shall be the current published editions including all latest revisions,
amendments, addendums and additions.
B. Reference Standards
1. Governing Local Authority rules and regulations & HSE requirements

2. Dubai Municipality Code of Construction Safety Practice
3. Employer’s HSE requirements as per the Contract Documents as applicable
4. BS 5975:2008 Code of Practice for Temporary Works procedure and permissible stress
design for false work
5. BS EN 12812:2004, False work – Performance requirements and general design
6. BS 449-2:1969, Specification for the use of structural steel in building – Part 2: Metric units
Page: 2 of 20
7. BS 648, Schedule of weights of building materials

8. BS 1139 series, Metal scaffolding including the latest relevant version in BS EN standards
where superseded.
9. BS 4978:1996, Specification for visual strength grading of softwood
10. BS 5268 -2:2002, Structural use of timber – Part 2: Code of Practice for permissible stress
design, materials and workmanship
11. BS 5507-1, Methods of test for false work equipment – Part 1: Floor centres
12. BS 5507-3, Methods of test for false work equipment – Part 3: Props
13. BS 5628-1, Code of practice for the use of masonry – Part 1: Structural use of unreinforced
masonry
14. BS 5756:2007, Specification for visual strength grading of hardwood
15. BS 5930:1999, Code of practice for site investigations
16. BS 5975:1996+A2:2004, Code of practice for false work
17. BS 6399-1, Loading for buildings – Part 1: Code of practice for dead and imposed loads
18. BS 6399-2:1997, Loading for buildings – Part 2: Code of practice for wind loads
19. BS 8118-1, Structural use of aluminium – Part 1: Code of practice for design
20. BS 8118-2, Structural use of aluminium – Part 2: Specification for materials, workmanship
and protection
21. BS EN 39:2001, Loose steel tubes for tube and coupler scaffolds – Technical delivery
conditions
22. BS EN 74-1, Couplers for steel tube – Requirements and test procedures
23. BS EN 1011-1, Welding – Recommendations for welding of metallic materials – Part 1:
General guidance for arc welding
24. BS EN 1011-2, Welding – Recommendations for welding of metallic materials – Part 2: Arc
welding of ferritic steels
25. BS EN 1065:1999, Adjustable telescopic steel props – Product specifications, design and
assessment by calculation and test
26. BS EN 1313-1:1997, Round and sawn timber – Permitted deviations and preferred sizes –
Softwood sawn timber
27. BS EN 1313-2:1999, Round and sawn timber – Permitted deviations and preferred sizes –
Hardwood sawn timber
28. BS EN 1991-1-1, Eurocode 1 – Actions on structures – General actions – Densities, self-
weight, imposed loads for buildings
29. BS EN 1992-1-1, Eurocode 2 – Design of concrete structures – General rules and rules for
buildings
30. BS EN 10025-2:2004, Hot rolled products of non-alloy structural steels – Technical delivery
conditions
31. BS EN 12811-1:2003, Temporary works equipment – Part 1: Scaffolds – Performance
requirements and general design
32. BS EN 12813, Temporary works equipment – Load bearing towers of prefabricated
components – Particular methods of structural design
C. Where there is a discrepancy between the standards; standards and specification; standards,
specification & proprietary formwork system requirements; more restrictive provisions and
recommendations shall be followed.
Page: 3 of 20
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Submittal Procedures and submit the following
at the relevant stages;
B. Post Contract Submittals
1. The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer, the CV and copy of license of the
qualified competent structural engineer who will prepare the design calculations and working
drawings of the falsework and formwork systems.
2. Formwork submittal shall include prequalification for proposed system manufacturer and
proposed third party independent design check/ inspection agency.
3. Material submittal shall include a full compliance statement, details of proposed system,
load capacity of formwork components, recent test results for various components, samples
if required by the Engineer etc. complete.
4. Design calculations duly signed and stamped by the third party independent agency shall be
submitted for each element of works for Engineer’s approval.
5. Shop drawings shall be include floor layouts, elevations & sections and shall be fully
dimensioned and detailed. All coordinated openings/ voids required for structural,
architectural and MEP services shall be properly represented in the drawings
6. Diagrammatic drawings to confirm the profiles, sizes, dimensions, locations and patterns of
features, tie holes, rustications, construction joints and other design elements shall be
included in the shop drawings.
7. Erection and dismantling sequence must be indicated in the shop drawings
8. A detailed Method Statement shall be submitted for formwork erection and dismantling for
approval. The Method statement shall clearly state
a. Fabrication and transportation of the forms
b. Erection sequence
c. Verticality and Horizontal alignment checks during erection as well as concreting
d. Post pour alignment check
e. Casting of control cubes if applicable
f. Access details
g. HSE issues
h. Sequence of stripping
i. Time of striking shall be clearly indicated on the shop drawings
j. Transportation of stripped formwork elements to next level/ storage yard
k. Protection of formwork elements
l. Proposed actions against overloading of formwork, base slab element
m. Permit to Load and Permit to Strip procedure
n. Check lists
9. No formwork erection shall be started without Engineer’s approvals for the above submittals
as a minimum.
10. Method Statement: Cranes or other construction equipment.
a. Submit for review method statements and details of crane equipment and any
other construction equipment, which shall be used to erect formwork and place con-
Page: 4 of 20
crete, which effect any structural elements indicated on the Design Drawings. Include
details for dismantling and removal of crane upon Completion of Work.
11. Method Statement, Earth Forms: Submit proposal for use of earth forms to the
Engineer for review and comment prior to implementation.
12. Method Statement, Removal of Formwork: Submit for review the proposed method
and sequence of removal of props, taking into account the above minimum details for
striking formwork. Refer to ACI 347, Guide to Formwork for Concrete.
1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination
1. The information contained in the design drawings show the design intent. The contractor
shall be responsible for the final coordination of all trades and implementation of any effect
of this coordination on the structural framing and forming requirements, subject to approval
by the Engineer.
2. Any critical dimensions controlled by as built conditions of other structures in the field shall
be verified on site prior to fabrication of the members.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible to check the design drawings for any transfer beams or
planted columns supported on structural elements to ensure that any propping or back
propping is supported by completely cured & complete concrete framing systems below.
4. For any permanent formwork metal deck sheeting specified on the design drawings, the
contractor shall verify the exact span conditions on site and check the span limits for that
deck type and provide propping if necessary.
B. Design
1. Contractor shall be fully responsible for the design and construction of all temporary works
that includes but not limited to formworks, scaffolding, access platforms, loading platforms
etc. complete
2. The Contractor shall appoint and pay all costs for an independent third party licensed
agency to design and inspection the works. Temporary works designed by proprietary
system manufacturers shall be verified and stamped by this company. At each stage of the
works during the construction, inspections shall be carried out and “permit to load” and
“permit to strike” forms shall be signed off by this agency.
3. The Contractor shall have a separate dedicated team to sign off the formwork fabrication/
erection/ dismantling to ensure that the system is handled properly.
4. All associated access and platform structures shall be authorized by certified competent
Safety Engineer, prior to use.
C. Design Loading
1. Design and construct formwork, shoring, bracing and back propping to withstand the worst
combination of:
a. Total weight of formwork, reinforcement and concrete.
b. Construction loads including dynamic effects of placing, compacting and construction
traffic.
c. Wind loads.
d. Hydrostatic pressure exerted by concrete based on the proposed mix design and slump
characteristics, properties/effects of admixtures and cement replacement additives, rate
of pour, placing method, concrete temperature, formwork size/ shape etc. complete
Page: 5 of 20
e. Permanent lost in below ground formwork pile caps, foundations, trenches, manholes
etc. shall be designed to withstand the earth pressure, additional earth pressure while
back filling due to machineries and hydrostatic pressure of concrete in relevant stages of
construction.
f. CIRIA Report 108, Concrete Pressure on Formwork may be used for guidance of form-
work design with appropriate modifications to incorporate concrete properties specific
for the Project and placing conditions. Appropriate allowance shall be made for high
slump concrete mixes and concrete with ggbs and super plasticisers where the setting
time is prolonged.
2
g. Any temporary loading out platform shall be designed for a minimum load of 5 kN/m for
general handling of materials. For concrete block palettes etc. the minimum design load
2
shall be 20 kN/ m . This shall be considered as additional superimposed load should the
Contractor intends to use the recently cast slabs for stacking blocks/ rebars, formworks
etc as well as during the time back props are in place and shall be considered in addi-
tion to the live load allowance made in codes.
h. Back propping shall be designed for the loads to be transferred the details of which shall
be indicated in the design submission.
i. Formwork design for self-compacting concrete shall consider the additional loads, if
pumping from the bottom of formwork is planned.
2. Formwork designer shall consider the effects of large concentrated loading from props on
support slabs from some of the modern formwork systems allowing large spacing between
props and allow for appropriate additional back propping if required.
3. Post Tension Slabs
a. Formwork designer shall consider the unsymmetrical loading on formwork in a post ten-
sion slab and shall include in his design appropriate allowance.
b. Written permission from the Post Tension Slab designer (if the PT design is Contractor’s
responsibility) shall be submitted before striking post tension slab formwork. Specific
reference shall be made if the formwork can be struck before grouting the PT ducts.
4. Propping
a. Provide adequate propping to prevent deflection and damage to the formwork. Carry
down such props to bearings strong enough to provide adequate support.
b. Propping of profiled steel sheets. Provide continuous support along the centre of each
span until the concrete has reached an adequate strength as agreed with the Employer.
5. Bearings
a. Prop through other decks if construction load on a particular deck exceeds:
1). The design loading or,
2). The reduced loading capacity of the slab below where less than 28 days have
elapsed from casting.
6. Backpropping
a. Design documents shall clearly state the assumptions of load transferred for each level
below and how the back propping is designed.
b. Back propping may require bracings which shall be indicated in the shop drawings
c. As a minimum, back propping shall be provided for at least two levels below the form-
work support slab.
7. Cambers
a. Cambers shown on the drawings or specified below relate to the concrete immediately
before formwork is struck. Make adequate allowance for deflection of formwork under
weight of fresh concrete. Top surfaces of concrete must also be cambered to maintain
the required structural depths and profiles.
Page: 6 of 20
b. Unless otherwise shown on drawings or required by Formwork designer, construct

forms to achieve the following upward cambers:
1). Slabs: 0.1% of span measured at centre.
2). Beams: 0.1% of span measured at centre.
3). Cantilever beams: 0.2% of cantilever measured at free end
c. After striking of formwork and removal of props check levels to determine extent of any
residual camber and inform Employer.
8. Other design and fabrication considerations
a. Provide 25mm chamfers to corners all exposed concrete elements including walls, col-
umns, beams unless noted otherwise on Architect’s drawings.
b. Inspection and cleaning openings for the formwork shall be provided so that they can be
conveniently closed before placing the concrete.
c. Formwork shall be planned to permit easy removal and shall be strong enough to retain
the correct shape during consolidation of the concrete.
d. In long spans, the anticipated deflection due to the effect of self-weight shall be accu-
rately computed by the Contractor and taken into account in the design of formwork
such that the finished concrete member shall have true surfaces conforming to lines,
planes and elevations shown on drawings. If adequate foundations for shores are not
secured, trussed supports shall be provided by the Contractor.
e. The method of establishing the equivalent cube strength of the concrete in the critical
area at the time of striking should be stated
A. Standards, General: All Building Codes, Industry Standard specifications and applicable By-
Laws referred to in the Specification shall be the current published editions including all latest
revisions, amendments, addendums and additions.
B. Refer to all relevant ASTM International and ACI Standards for this Work Section. Where there
is no relevant ASTM or ACI standard the Contractor is to make reference to the relevant British
Standard.
C. Alternative standards may be proposed to the Engineer for consideration. The Engineer
shall be the sole judge as to whether the proposed standards adequately support the
Design Intent.
D. Provide method and schedule of construction for shoring, stripping and re-shoring
procedures, materials, arrangement of joints, special architectural exposed finishes, ties, liners,
and locations of temporary embedded parts.
E. Provide formwork design data, such as permissible rate of concrete placement, and
temperature of concrete in forms.
F. System manufacturer shall supervise and certify the installations at each stage.
G. Provide the proposed sequence of erection and removal of formwork and falsework.
H. “Permit to Load” shall be obtained prior to starting rebar works and then before placing concrete.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage
Page: 7 of 20
1. Store materials in a manner to permit easy access for inspection and identification
2. Do not store materials on any portion of the structure in a manner that might cause distortion
or damage to the members of the supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged
materials or structures at no additional cost to the Employer.
3. Keep steel members off the ground, using pallets, platforms or other supports.
4. Protect steel deck and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.
B. Handling: Comply with the governing local authority health and safety regulations
C. Immediately after striking the formwork face shall be cleaned thoroughly if it is intended to be re-
used.
D. The formwork shall be stored in a clean and tidy area, in a proper way to prevent deformations.
Storing method shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations. The formwork shall be
protected with suitable means to prevent it from damaged by sun and wind.
E. Care should be taken, when re-using formwork, that its surface shall be smooth and clean and
that it shall be free from warping, twisting or other deformation. Any formwork which has, in the
opinion of the Engineer has deteriorated sufficiently to render it unsuitable for the work shall be
rejected and must be removed from the site immediately or must be dismantled up at once and
replaced with new formwork at the contractor’s expense.
Page: 8 of 20
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Sustainability
1. Ensure at least 50% of all structural steel (by weight) has a minimum of 25% post-consumer
recycled content or is reused.
2. Ensure at least 20% of material cost of the building is sourced from regional materials with
500km of the project site. The furthest point of origin of a material is to be measured as
either the furthest distance travelled to the project site from the point of extraction, harvest or
recovery or the point of manufacture. Products manufactured within the UAE will
automatically be considered within the 500km. the term “manufacture” in this context shall
mean ‘to process or fabricate a raw material into a finished product. It excludes simple
assembly.
B. GENERAL
1. Materials, new or of a quality similar to new materials shall only be used for formwork and
accessories. Forming surface shall be smooth and clean and free from warping, twisting or
other deformation.
2. Upon delivery of materials, the same shall be offered for inspection and approval by the
Engineer.
3. Materials shall be transported, handled and stored on the site or elsewhere, in such a
manner as to prevent damage.
4. Formwork not approved for use, shall be removed immediately from the site at the
Contractor’s expense.
5. The formwork used will be suitable for obtaining the specified finishes. Plywood should be
coated or film faced to avoid absorption of water during concreting.
6. Sawn boards will not be accepted as formwork unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
7. Plastic faced marine ply wood shall be used unless approved otherwise. Use of smooth
metal or fibreglass forms could be permitted at Engineer’s discretion. Other materials like
expanded polystyrene blocks (EPS 22 as per ASTM D6817) could be permitted for lost in
formwork subject to Engineer’s approval.
8. The release agents shall be insoluble in water, non-staining, and non-injurious to the
concrete.
9. Block outs shall be formed with wood or extruded closed cell polystyrene insulation.
C. PROPRIETARY FORMWORK SYSTEM
1. All the concrete elements shall be formed with approved proprietary formwork system. The
system selection criteria should include technical issues like required concrete surface
finishes, easy removal, site logistics, HSE risk elements, applicability for the given concrete
member, suitability for use at interface between various concrete members, technical
support etc. complete.
2. Proprietary formwork systems shall be designed and supplied by the system manufacturer
and validated by third party municipality approved structural engineer.
3. Proprietary formwork system shall include the back propping to required levels and shall be
designed and supplied by the manufacturer as per item A above.
4. All the system components shall be sourced from system manufacturer. Mixing of
components shall be strictly forbidden.
D. RELEASE AGENTS
Page: 9 of 20
1. Use release agents, which are suitable for use with the type(s) of formwork, formed finishes
and specified applied finishes. Use the same type and make throughout the entire area of
any one finish. Apply evenly to form faces, from top downwards, and to horizontal surfaces
last. Use the minimum amount necessary to obtain a clean release and prevent excessive
local collection. Prevent release agent touching the reinforcement hardened concrete, other
materials not part of the form face, and permanent forms.
2. Right amount of release agents shall be applied using brush, roller or spray avoiding excess
coating which might affect the appearance or cause retardation.
3. For exposed architectural concrete, the release agent and its’ effects must be demonstrated
on a prototype wall and is subject to architect’s approval.
4. If considerable time lapse occurs between the application of release agent and actual
casting or if a dust storm or rain affected the surface, the surface must be coated with
release agent again.
5. Release agents with very low flash points shall not be used.
E. SURFACE RETARDERS
1. Do not use without approval. Prevent retarder from touching the reinforcement.
Page: 10 of 20
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Experienced Operatives
1. Operatives shall be skilled and experienced with the material and equipment being used.
2. Where necessary, provide adequate training in association with the manufacturers
recommendations.
3. Adequate supervision shall be provided at all times and all supervisors shall be skilled in
each of the methods of application under his control.
B. Construction Loading
1. Assume complete responsibility for the loading of formwork due to construction loads.
2. The Contractor shall verify when it is acceptable to place loads on the formwork with the
supplier who shall substantiate that the deck shall not be damaged or shall have a reduced
capacity as a result of the proposed construction loads.
3. Assume responsibility to repair any damage that occurs to the deck due to construction
loads caused by Contractor's activities and by the activities of Subcontractors.
C. Temperature Effect
1. In setting out and erecting continuous structures, proper adjustments shall be made as
directed by the Engineer to counteract dimensional discrepancies owing to temperature
variations from the specified mean.
D. Forms shall be shaded from the sun for a minimum of 3 hours before concrete is poured.
E. Formwork shall be fixed in perfect lines, grades and dimensions, with no crevices at joints. It
shall be securely braced, supported and wedged so as to retain its position without displacement
or deflection during the placing and compaction of concrete. All joints shall be either horizontal
or vertical, unless otherwise required. No slab cutouts shall be placed without approved shop
drawings showing the same.
F. Before any concrete is placed, forms shall be properly cleaned by washing out with water and/or
air under pressure to remove sawdust, shavings, metal and other foreign matter. All water shall
then be drained and mopped out from the formwork. In no case shall concrete be placed in the
forms until such forms have been approved by the Engineer. Such approval shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility for the formwork.
G. Light weight “flying forms” shall not be erected during windy conditions. As soon as they are
erected, they must be secured properly to the vertical elements.
H. Particular attention must be paid to ensure that the pins in a telescopic prop are correctly
inserted.
I. Keep aluminum and steel props, props of different diameter completely segregated with a clear
signage indicating the details to prevent accidental mixing of the same.
J. Baseplate of the props shall rest on firm surface as per designer’s details.
K. Cross bracings and shoring shall be provided as per approved design drawings.
L. No changes to approved formwork design drawing shall be permitted to be made at site without
designer’s written confirmation.
M. Sequence of erection shall be strictly followed as per approved documents.
Page: 11 of 20
N. Joints in forms
1. Construct formwork, including joints in form linings and between forms and completed work,
to prevent loss of grout, using seals when necessary. Secure formwork tight against
adjacent concrete to prevent formation of steps.
2. A foam strip or swellable strip shall be provided at the bottom of vertical formwork in a kicker
less construction.
O. Inserts, Holes and Chases
1. Fix inserts or box out as required in correct positions before placing concrete. Form all holes
and chases; do not cut hardened concrete without approval.
P. Form Ties
1. No metal part of any device for securing forms is to remain within the specified concrete
cover.
2. Do not use ties in formwork for watertight and below ground/ buried construction.
3. Proprietary formwork system particularly designed for water tight construction may be
approved by the Engineer provided the tie rod system has proprietary water-stop system
and the proprietary grouting arrangement with proprietary product. Lost in pvc sleeves shall
remain within the specified concrete cover.
4. Only proprietary tie rods and wing nuts shall be used at spacing indicated in the formwork
design drawings.
3.2 ACCESS
A. Clear and unobstructed access shall be provided to all the areas of formwork erection. The
bracings and shoring shall be arranged in such a way that access is not obstructed.
B. Where confined spaces are formed during formwork erection (e.g. lift and stairwells), appropriate
access and egress arrangement shall be made.
C. For columns and walls access shall be made available from all the sides for inspection as well
as working.
D. Inspection of works may be suspended if in the opinion of Engineer/ Engineer’s Assistant the
access provided is not satisfactory.
E. Housekeeping of all access ways shall be carried out regularly, all loose materials, nails, tripping
hazards etc. shall be cleared off.
3.3 USE OF EXPANDED METAL SHEETS FOR STOP ENDS
A. If it is the intention of the Contractor to use expanded metal sheet like HyRib for stop ends,
following conditions shall be complied.
B. The detailing shall be made in such a way that expamet sheet also shall have the same cover as
rebars.
C. Ensure that concrete grout fills the mesh voids completely
D. Where HyRib sheets are overlapped, the overlapping sheet shall be removed before casting
second slab.
E. HyRib must be supported properly by wooden runners/ U-bars.
Page: 12 of 20
3.4 EXAMINATION
A. Surface Conditions:
1. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Work Section shall be
performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do
not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.5 TOLERANCES
A. Construct formwork accurately and robustly with adequate supports to produce finished concrete
to the required dimensions. Formed surfaces must be free from twist and bow (other than any
required cambers), all intersections, lines and angles being square, plumb and true.
B. Refer to section 030000 for required tolerances for finished concrete works.
Page: 13 of 20
3.6 STRIKING
A. Responsibility
1. Strike formwork without disturbing, damaging or overloading structure, and without

disturbing props. Notwithstanding other clauses in this specification and any checking or
approvals by the Employer, the responsibility for safe removal of any part of the formwork
and any supports without damaging the structure rests with Contractor. Striking of formwork
shall be fully supervised by Contractor by competent foremen/ site engineers and safety
engineer.
2. No formwork elements shall be removed without signed “Permit to Strike” issued as per
clause 1.3 above.
B. Minimum Periods
1. The following periods (in days) for retaining formwork in position before striking apply to
ordinary Portland cement concrete with no cement replacement materials or admixtures :
Element Time to strike
Vertical formwork to columns, 12 hours

walls and beams**
Soffit forms to slabs 7
Soffit forms to beams (excluding 7

cantilevers)
Soffit forms to cantilevers 11
Props to beams/cantilevers 14
** For deep sections, the stripping time of vertical forms shall be agreed with the Engineer after due considerations
given to temperature gradient due to heat of hydration.
2. These minimum periods stated above assumes that the structural elements are not loaded
to full design loading within 28days after casting or until they achieve design strength
whichever is later. The contractor shall validate this assumption.
3. These minimum requirements shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to delay the
removal of forms if the concrete has not attained its specified working strength due to
construction sequencing, early superimposed load application or if required by the Engineer
for whatsoever reasons. The Engineer, may, at his discretion, vary these minimum periods.
4. Critical structural elements such as long span cantilevers (>2.5m) , long span beams (>10m)
, long span slabs (>10m) etc., may require prolonged duration of retaining the formwork in
position. The striking time for such elements shall be agreed with the Engineer.
5. Submit details of proposed periods for mixes using admixtures or other types of cement.
6. Alternative methods of determining minimum periods for retaining formwork in positions may
be submitted for approval. Accept responsibility for cost of checking of proposals by
Employer and for any testing.
7. All concrete members which have not reached a strength which is sufficient to make the
Page: 14 of 20
members self-supporting or are structurally incomplete shall be propped or otherwise

supported to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
8. In the case of beams or floor slabs in structures of more than one floor the weight of wet and
green concrete shall be carried by a system of props which continue through at least two
storeys or are supported by the ground. The props shall remain in place over the two
storeys until minimum 14 days after the wet concrete (of the uppermost floor) is cast.
C. Sequencing
1. Formwork striking sequence shall be strictly in accordance with formwork designer’s

recommendation. Overloading the slabs below by following incorrect sequence shall not be
avoided.
2. The principle of sequencing such as easing the props first, starting at mid span and
progressing towards support etc. shall be clearly indicated in the Method Statement and
strictly followed.
3. For cantilevers also the principle of striking at the end and moving towards the supports
shall be clearly described and followed.
4. Particular attention must be paid to formwork at construction joints of slabs/ beams. Props
under a slab/ beam, not designed as cantilever slab/beam, cast partially to provide
construction joint shall not be removed until the subsequent pour is completed and required
strength is achieved. Similarly the careful considerations shall be given to cantilever and the
immediate span adjacent to a cantilever span.
D. Other Considerations
1. All concrete members which have not reached a strength which is sufficient to make the
members self-supporting or are structurally incomplete shall be propped or otherwise
supported to the satisfaction of the Engineer. In the case of beams or floor slabs the weight
of wet and green concrete shall be carried by a system of back props which continue
through at least two storeys or are supported by the ground.
2. Early striking does not relieve the Contractor of his duties to ensure that the concrete is
adequately cured. If formwork is removed early, curing compound must be applied to the
exposed surfaces, including soffits.
3. The method of establishing the required equivalent concrete cube strength in the critical
area of the slab should be agreed before construction starts. Simulated curing on additional
cubes could be carried out.
4. Where it is intended to leave the slab formwork as back props for next level of casting, the
props shall be de-jacked in the whole area and then re-jacked. Alternatively, the table may
be lowered and then put back in position after allowing the slab to attract loading. Formwork
designer’s recommendations on this issue shall be indicated in the Method Statement and
shall be followed strictly.
3.7 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SLIP FORM CONCRETE
A. Slip form is the term given to self-climbing formwork systems specifically intended to construct
concrete walls and columns in high rise buildings. The formwork system shall be designed,
fabricated, erected, supported, braced and maintained by the Contractor, so that it will be
capable of supporting without failure, all vertical and lateral loads that may reasonably be
anticipated to be applied to the formwork.
B. Design considerations
The following factors must be addressed by the designer of these types of formwork:
1. Minimum concrete strength required prior to climbing.
Page: 15 of 20
2. Allowance for all loads, including dynamic and wind loads that may be applied to the form, at
all stages of the construction cycle. Loads applied by workers, loading out of materials and
concrete placing activities must also be allowed for. Allowance may also need to be made
for impact loading when materials are lifted onto the deck of the form. The designer must
consider the effects of eccentric loading on the form, both during climbing and at other
times, and note the requirements in the operating procedures for the form.
3. The maximum degree to which the form can be out-of-level during climbing, and the
procedure required both to minimise the likelihood of this occurring and how to remedy the
situation if the form becomes out-of-level.
4. Consideration of rescue procedures that may affect the design of the form. The rescue
procedure may require access to all levels of the form and cells, either through the provision
of gates or removal of panels on the form.
5. The steel rods or pipes on which jacks climb or by which the forms are lifted shall be
specifically designed for that purpose and adequately braced where not encased in
concrete.
6. Forms shall be designed to prevent excessive distortion of the structure during the jacking
operation.
7. Jacks and vertical supports shall be positioned in such a manner that the loads do not
exceed the rated capacity of the jacks.
8. The jacks or other lifting devices shall be provided with mechanical dogs or other automatic
holding devices to support the slip forms whenever failure of the power supply or lifting
mechanism occurs.
9. The form structure shall be maintained within all design tolerances specified for plumb
during the jacking operation.
10. The predetermined safe rate of lift shall not be exceeded.
C. Access
1. Access to the form may be provided in a variety of ways including one or more of the
following
a. Personnel and material hoists on the building;
b. Permanent stair systems in the building;
c. A trailing stair system suspended from the slip form or jump form;
d. A trailing ladder system.
2. The access area between the trailing access system and the building should be clear of trip
hazards and there should be no gaps between platforms exceeding 100 mm wide.
3. The designer of formwork should ensure the trailing access system is designed for loads
that could be applied in an emergency evacuation situation. Both the strength of the system
itself, and the ability of the form to withstand applied loads from the access system, should
be adequate. The trailing stair access system should be designed for a load of at least
2.5kPa.
4. Ladders should be secured in place and should be placed at an angle not greater than that
is allowed under regulations.
5. Access openings for ladders and cells on working decks should be provided with trapdoors
that are closed except when being accessed. Trapdoors should be provided with a device
so that they can be easily opened from above. This device should not pose a trip hazard for
persons on the deck.
6. Access ways should be kept free of materials and rubbish to prevent objects falling to the
level(s) below.
D. Working Platforms
Page: 16 of 20
1. All working platforms should be provided with leading and perimeter edge protection. All
penetrations should be covered by form ply that is secured in position.
2. When placing steel or pouring concrete into a form, controls should be provided to prevent a
person falling into or off the form. This becomes more of an issue when the width of the
form is greater than 225 mm prior to placement of reinforcing steel. A person working in
proximity to projecting reinforcing steel or other objects must be protected from the risk of
being impaled by these objects. Suitable controls may include edge protection on the
internal side of the working platform or sheets of steel reinforcement mesh temporarily
placed on top of the form that is, the steel can be fed through the gaps in the mesh.
3. All platforms that may be affected by uplift should be positively secured so that uplift cannot
occur. The formwork and securing system should be designed accordingly and clearly
identified. Uplift can occur from wind loading or when a platform is out-of-level and
unsecured. In the latter instance, the platform can see-saw when a load is applied to the
end of the platform and then drop a person off the platform if one of the platforms supports
moves. This may be the case where working platforms are supported by a trailing screen on
one side and a parapet of the building on the other.
4. Where individual cells of the form are climbed at different times, edge protection should be
provided on each of the raised cells.
E. Climbing the Forms
1. It is important to ensure the different parts of the form remain level during the climbing
process. Climbing is usually carried out using a series of climbing devices set up to lift at
the same time and at the same rate. If the lifting system is not properly synchronised the
form may become wedged on the structure or structural members may be overloaded.
There should therefore be a system to ensure that the form does not go out-of-level during
the climbing procedure. This system may be an automated system or may rely on operators
stopping the climbing process.
2. The following shall be ensured
a. Only persons directly involved with the climbing process should be located on the form
during the climbing process.
b. Any potential nip or shear points where a person could be injured during the climb are
identified and controlled.
c. All obstructions on the form have been removed prior to the form being climbed. A
'sign-off' procedure for this should be provided. This includes the removal of 'Z-bars',
ferrule bolts and other material that would snag on the structure if they were not re-
moved.
d. Services including electrical cable and water pipes have been designed so that they will
not rupture or snag as the form is climbed.
F. Ventilation & Lighting
1. Adequate ventilation and access to all cells in jump forms or slip forms should be provided.
It may be necessary to specify maximum times for particular cells depending on
temperature, humidity and cell size. These times should be developed as part of a work
method statement.
2. Adequate ventilation and access should also be provided within cells and it may be
necessary to provide ventilation grills, exhaust fans or access ways in the cells.
3. Working in confined space shall be carried out only with appropriate HSE permit.
G. Emergency Measures
1. Fire extinguishers, hoses and other means of fire prevention and control must be provided
on the jump form or slip form in accordance with relevant legislation.
2. Emergency procedures for the jump form or slip form must be developed, documented and
Page: 17 of 20
implemented. Persons must be trained in these procedures and a list of persons who have
received the training must be documented.
3. The emergency procedures must include, but not be limited to the following:
a. The method of alert in the event of an emergency and the method of extracting persons
from each location or cell that the persons have access to or could fall into.
b. When to evacuate persons from the form.
c. Evacuation muster points both on and off the form.
d. Training in the use of fire extinguishers.
e. Identifying persons responsible for ensuring evacuation takes place.
f. Rescue procedures in the event of severe medical conditions.
g. Identifying persons responsible for rescuing workers.
h. Rescue training for persons involved in rescuing others, where outside experts will not
be responsible for performing the rescue.
4. Where the form can be accessed using cranes on site, a first aid box for emergency rescue
of injured and incapacitated persons must be readily available and accessible at all times
while work is being undertaken.
5. Response to emergency situations must be considered during formwork design stages and
in an on-going way during construction. Emergency situations requiring evacuation of an
injured worker from a formwork 'cell' need to consider how to safely remove an immobilized
or unconscious person. This may include creating emergency access holes and doorways
through decks and screens. Procedures must identify how to access lift voids and other
areas, including cells within the core which may have limited access.
6. Emergency services contacts must be clearly identified and available. These must be
nominated by all parties on site, including the principal contractor, sub-contractors and
workers.
H. Miscellaneous
1. Details of any openings, sleeves, door openings etc. must be submitted for approval.
Rebars should not be used to support the sleeves and openings.
2. All the rip boxes, couplers and other inserts must be placed correctly in the predetermined
levels and alignment.
3. Welding of slip form components with rebars shall not be permitted.
I. Concrete Grade and Compatibility
1. The Contractor shall ensure that the slip form system is compatible with the specified grade
of concrete. Generally slip form should not be used for concrete with micro silica and new
age admixtures. A full trial mix shall be arranged to verify the setting time of concrete,
required slump in addition to the strength and durability requirements.
J. concreting - Preparatory Works
1. The previously cast surface should be cleaned thoroughly, roughened and pre-wetted for at
least two hours.
2. Work out the thickness of each layer of concrete. The thickness of each layer of fresh
concrete shall be such that initial setting of each layer of concrete does not take place
before the next layer is poured. When the form is slipped, the concrete must not be either
too stiff so that form does not pulls the concrete up resulting in cracking or too soft so that
the concrete does not slump.
3. Workout the required quantity of concrete for each layer (for the entire section) and arrange
with the Concrete Supplier to batch this concrete quantity simultaneously, so that concrete
Page: 18 of 20
across the section in the same level is of “same age”.

4. Arrangements shall be made to finish the concrete in same level in case of a break down
(e.g. use of tower crane if the concrete pump breaks down).
5. As the slipping activities can extend to longer hours, the Contractor shall arrange sufficient
man power, supervision and lighting.
6. Separate gang of masons with a dedicated foreman must be arranged in the trailing platform
for the “rubbing works”.
K. Concrete Placing
1. Cold joints shall not be allowed. Ensure the supply of concrete, dosage of retarder and
slipping activity in such a way that no cold joints are formed.
2. Maintain the thickness of each layer as previously determined. (200mm to 300mm is
common thickness).
3. Particular attention should be paid to the vibration of concrete. The steel reinforcement and
formwork sides must not be touched with vibrators, lest it would disturb the just stiffened
concrete below. Free flow concrete could be used to minimise the vibrating operations.
L. Slipping Operation
1. An experienced technician shall be employed for the slipping operation.

2. The concrete layer to be slipped must be probed to ensure that it is stiff enough to retain its
shape after slipping.
3. If the concrete is cracked or collapsed, the operation must be stopped immediately and
Engineer’s permission must be obtained for remedial action.
M. Repair Works
1. Only the surface irregularities and small blow holes must be repaired by the repair team in
the trailing platform. Major defects if any must be brought to the notice of Engineer before
proceeding with repairs. It may be required that the repairs may have to be carried out only
after the concrete fully sets.
2. Only proprietary and approved repair materials shall be used in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Method statements shall be issued for typical repairs.
Method statements approved the Engineer, shall be strictly adhered to.
3. As the slip form generally involves forming MEP and Lift shafts which are not accessible
later on, all the repair works must be carried out from the trailing platform.
N. Curing
1. Approved white pigmented curing compound shall be applied immediately after the concrete
surface repairs are completed and rubbing of surfaces is completed from the trailing
platform. Arrangements to prevent flash setting of concrete, particularly in hot weather shall
be made. The top of the walls shall be kept wet with water or other approved method. If
required by the Engineer arrangements shall be made to protect the new concrete from
direct sun light.
O. Final Slipping
1. Generally the slipping of the final 2-3 layers is done after the concrete is partly hardened.
Depending upon the mix design, the actual time when the final slipping can be done must be
worked out as any error in this could form failure of concrete (cracking).
P. Cleaning of Form
1. The Contractor shall ensure that the cleaning the slip form surface by scraping and with high
speed water jet must not commence when the top layer of the concrete is still green. The
Page: 19 of 20
debris must not stick to the partly set concrete. Also the partly set concrete must not be
disturbed during the cleaning operation.
Q. Jack rod cavities
1. The holes left by the slip form jack rod holes must be grouted after removing the jack rods at
every fifth level (maximum) with approved shrinkage compensated cementatious grouting
material. Any hydraulic oil filled inside this hole must be removed and the hole must be
grouted.
3.8 SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. General:
1. Errors in shop fabrication or deformation resulting from handling and transportation that
prevent the proper assembly and structural fitting of parts shall be reported immediately to
the Engineer, and approval of the method of correction shall be obtained. Approved
corrections shall be made at no additional cost to the Employer.
2. Inspect and check the complete formwork, shoring and bracing to ensure that the
work is in accordance with the formwork design as submitted to the Engineer.
3. If requested, submit test data on patented and proprietary devices and assemblies that are
proposed for use on the work to the acceptance of the Engineer.
3.9 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Cleaning
1. Prior to placement of concrete or other finish materials, the deck shall be cleaned to be
free of debris and water.
2. Clean the forms as erection proceeds to remove foreign matter. Remove cuttings,
shavings and debris from within the forms prior to Project use.
END OF SECTION
Page: 20 of 20
WSP | Parsons Brinckerhoff Section 032000 Concrete Reinforcing
SECTION 032000 – Concrete Reinforcing ................................................................................................ 2

PART 1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1 SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................... 2
1.3 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................. 3
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................ 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................ 6
2.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................... 6
2.2 FABRICATION ................................................................................................................................ 8
PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................... 8
3.1 EXAMINATION ............................................................................................................................... 8
3.2 PREPARATION .............................................................................................................................. 8
3.3 INSTALLATION .............................................................................................................................. 9
3.5 PROTECTION OF REBAR ........................................................................................................... 11
Page: 1 of 13
SECTION 032000 – CONCRETE REINFORCING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Read this Work Section in conjunction with other related Work Sections, the Design
Drawings and the Contract Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections.
B. Related Work Sections
1. 033000 Concrete
2. 031100 Concrete Forming
3. 033800 Post Tensioned Concrete
4. 034000 Pre-cast Concrete
C. Work Section Includes
1. Concrete reinforcement
A. All the reinforcement materials and works shall comply with the requirements of following
codes and standards, unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Where there is a
discrepancy between the standards, specification and local authority requirements more
restrictive provisions and recommendations shall be applicable. The latest revision of the
codes and standards shall be applicable.
1. ACI-318M-14 Building Code Requirements for structural concrete

2. ACI detailing manual, SP-66, latest edition
3. ASTM A615M, A706M, A996M: Standard Specification for deformed and plain carbon-
steel bars for concrete reinforcement
4. ASTM A955M latest edition- Stainless steel reinforcing bars
5. ASTM 1035M: Standard Specification for deformed and plain low-carbon, chromium
steel bars for concrete reinforcement
6. ACI-315 -99 Details and detailing of concrete reinforcement
7. BS 4449:2005 + A2 2009 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete - Weldable reinforcing
steel, bar, coil and decoiled product – Specification for grade 500B MPa steel
8. BS 4482: 2005 Steel wire for reinforcement of concrete products – specification
9. BS 4483: 2005 Steel fabric for reinforcement of concrete products – specification
10. BS 8666: 2005 Scheduling, dimensioning, bending and cutting of steel reinforcement
for concrete – Specification
11. BS 7973-1: 2001 Spacers and chairs for steel reinforcement and their specification –
Product performance requirement
12. BS 7973-2: 2001 Spacers and chairs for steel reinforcement and their specification –
Fixing and application of spacers and chairs and tying of reinforcement
13. BS 7123:1989 Specification for metal arc welding of steel for concrete reinforcement
14. BS EN ISO 17660-1: 2006 Welding of reinforcing steel – load bearing welded joints
15. BS EN ISO 17660-2: 2006 Welding of reinforcing steel – non load bearing welded joints
16. BS EN ISO 3766: 2003 Construction drawings simplified representation of concrete
Page: 2 of 13
reinforcement
17. BS EN ISO 128 series Technical Drawings
18. BS EN ISO 5455 -1995 Technical Drawings - scales
19. Concrete Society: Spacers for reinforced concrete. 1989 Report CS101
20. CIRIA Report 147 ‘Care and Treatment of Steel Reinforcement and the Protection of
starter bars’
21. Concrete Society and CIRIA ‘A Guide to the Construction of Concrete in the Arabian
Peninsula
22. ASTM A1064/A1064M Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain, and Deformed, for Concrete.
23. ASTM B766 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium.
th
24. CRSI Manual for Standard Practice Placing of Reinforcement Bars. 28 Edition.
25. AWS D1.4/D1.4M Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.
26. Requirements of latest ordinances, rules and regulations of Local Municipal/ approving
Authorities
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 013300 Submittal Procedures
B. Initial submittal of material approval shall include prequalification document for each
proposed manufacturing mills along with Dubai Central Laboratory (DCL) certified test
reports not older than one month. Submit authority approval certificates where applicable.
Mixing of rebars from various mills is not acceptable.
C. The Contractor shall schedule the reinforcement in accordance with the project design codes
and references as stated on the design drawings and typical details. For projects concrete
structures deigned to British Standards or Eurocodes refer to BS EN 1992-1, 2 &3 : Design
of Concrete Structures, BS 8666: 2005 Specification for scheduling, dimensioning, bending
and cutting of steel reinforcement for concrete and BS EN ISO 3766. For concrete structures
designed to ACI standards refer to ACI 315-99 and other related codes and standards, the
information on the structural drawings, this specification and subsequent instructions.
D. The Contractor shall prepare reinforcement detail drawings and other relevant shop drawings
in paper format and on CD in latest versions of AutoCAD dwg format to the following scales:
1. GA plans 1:50 or 1:100 as appropriate

2. Walls and slabs 1:50
3. Beams and column elevations 1:20
4. Beam and column sections 1:20 or 1:10
E. The Contractor’s coordinated General Arrangement (GA) drawings incorporating all services
openings, structural inserts and dimensional coordination with architectural and Services
requirements shall be used as the base drawings for reinforcement GA drawings.
F. Indicate on the Shop Drawings the following:
1. Bar bending details.

2. List quantities of reinforcing.
3. Bar Sizes.
4. Spacing, locations of reinforcing and mechanical splices with identifying code marks to
permit correct placement without reference to structural Design Drawings.
Page: 3 of 13
5. Indicate sizes, spacing and locations of chairs, spacers and hangers.

6. Detail lap lengths and bar development lengths. Provide tension lap splices where
indicated, in accordance with design drawings typical details.
G. Bending schedules and reinforcement detail drawings shall be submitted for the Engineer’s
approval. The Contractor shall correct these schedules incorporating the Engineer’s
comments if any and resubmit as reasonably required to ensure a high standard of work. He
shall program his work and submit schedules for approval allowing time for such verification,
rectification and resubmission as necessary. Such approval shall not relieve the Contractor
of his responsibilities.
H. The reinforcing shall be fabricated and scheduled in accordance with ACI-315 Details and
Detailing of Concrete reinforcement and also in accordance with the project design codes
and typical details.
I. Part submittals of rebar drawings and schedules shall not be permitted. Plan, elevation,
sections and schedules shall be submitted together with all cross reference details clearly
marked. Rebars shall be marked on approved GA drawings for the coordinated concrete
elements.
J. Sketches shall not be acceptable.
K. These Shop Drawings shall show all openings for services, and upstands or plinths for
equipment and cast-in items, and associated rebar details in accordance with typical details.
L. Bending schedules and reinforcing detail Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the
Engineer for review. Staged submissions shall be made with 21-days being allowed for the
Engineer's consideration of each submission.
M. The schedules shall be corrected and resubmitted as reasonably required to ensure a high
standard of work. A program of work and schedules shall be submitted for review allowing
time for verification, rectification and resubmission as necessary. Such reviews shall not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the accuracy of such schedules.
N. Supplementary Shop Drawings: Prepare any additional shop and fabrication Shop Drawings
and other details necessary to instruct staff on the positioning, bending, supporting of
reinforcing and associated work.
O. No concreting shall be allowed to proceed until such time that the drawings and bending
schedules for that particular section of Works are approved. Any delay incurred in obtaining
approval shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.
P. Structural Design Drawings take precedence over placement Shop Drawings and bar
schedules unless otherwise instructed in writing by the Engineer. It is the responsibility of
the contractor to highlight any discrepancies in design drawings information prior to fixing
steel on site.
Q. Conform with the typical details indicated on the structural Design Drawings.
R. Substitutions: Substitution of different size bars permitted only with written acceptance of the
Engineer.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. On completion of the work the reinforcing Shop Drawings shall be updated and
submitted as "As-Built".
Page: 4 of 13
A. General
1. Contractor’s submittal of testing and reporting shall include

a. At pre-qualification stage – Submit recent test certificates (not older than one month
from the submission date) for all tests carried out for each proposed mill.
b. At off-site fabrication stage – Arrange for a full range of testing in independent
laboratory for each diameter and each mill and submit reports.
c. At delivery stage – submit mill certificates providing information on the product and
test results
d. During execution – Test reports from approved and accredited independent
laboratory for all the tests described in this section
B. Sampling
1. Submit samples of each bar diameter obtained from each supplier for testing to an
approved independent testing laboratory to verify compliance.
2. Selection of Test Specimens – Refer BS 4449. Test specimens shall be either at least
600 mm long or 20 times the nominal size, whichever is the greater.
a. A full range of physical and chemical properties shall be tested in independent
laboratory for each proposed mill at the start of rebar supply
b. For casts of 100 ton or less: three samples for tensile tests and one sample for
rebend test.
c. For casts greater than 100 ton: three samples for tensile tests and one sample for
rebend test for the first 100 ton, and an additional sample for tensile test and
rebend test for each full (or part over) 30 ton for rebars 16mm dia and less/ 50 ton
for rebars 20mm dia and more remaining.
d. Each sample shall originate from the same cast or manufacturing mill. If rebars
from more than one mill is being used, then the sampling for each mill shall be
taken separately.
C. Tests
1. Tensile Tests
a. The tensile strength, yield strength and elongation at fracture, total elongation at
maximum force shall be determined by the methods described in BS EN 10002
and evaluated as per BS 4449.
2. Rebend Tests
a. Rebend tests shall be done as per BS 4449
3. Chemical Properties
a. Chemical compositions shall be tested to confirm the compliance to code
requirements
4. Mass of steel
a. Permissible variations in the mass shall not exceed the specified parameters in BS
4449.
D. Reporting
1. Provide copies of manufacturer's certificates of test results relating to the batch of

reinforcement supplied. Reinforcement is to be delivered to site with the manufacturer's
batch numbers and test reports attached. The steel shall be tagged with batch numbers
and cross referenced to test reports. The report shall include the following as a
minimum
a. The place of manufacture of the reinforcing steels, mill name
Page: 5 of 13
b. The nominal diameter of the steel;

c. The grade of the steel;
d. The marking on the steel;
e. The cast number;
f. The date of testing;
g. The mass of the test unit;
h. The individual test results for all the properties specified.
2. Compile test results for tests carried out in approved independent laboratory and submit
every week.
A. Reinforcing shall not be subjected to rough handling, shock loading or dropping from a
height.
B. Reinforcing shall be stored in racks well clear of the ground, under cover and on level
supports and in a manner which shall not result in damage or deformation to the reinforcing
or in contamination of the reinforcing. Reinforcing shall be protected from contamination
by chloride from sea spray or windblown salts, and also from rusting that can take place
as a result of dew at night.
C. Reinforcing shall not be stored on or adjacent to concrete surfaces which form part of the
permanent work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars
1. Steel bars referred as Rebar, Reinforcement, deformed bars shall mean hot rolled steel
deformed bars conforming to BS 4449:2005 + A2:2009, Grade 500B
2. Fabric reinforcement to BS4483:2005
3. Any High strength rebar, as specified on the design drawings, shall conform to ASTM
1035M: Standard Specification for deformed and plain low-carbon, chromium steel bars
for concrete reinforcement.
4. Epoxy coated rebar where indicated shall conform to ASTM A775 or ASTM A934, while
epoxy coated welded wire reinforcement is specified according to ASTM A884. Epoxy
coating shall be carried out under closely controlled conditions in a factory.
5. Stainless steel rebar shall conform to ASTM A955M, latest edition
B. Rebar Couplers
1. All mechanical couplers shall be type II complying with ACI-318. Suppliers should
provide the following tests to certify that couplers are type 2 in accordance with ICC-ES:
a. Static Tension Test

b. Static Compression Test
c. Cyclic Tension & Compression Test.
2. All Couplers are only to be supplied from a manufacturer with an internationally
accredited Quality control system.
3. Manufacturers of couplers shall be registered members of the DCL quality assurance
scheme.
4. Full traceability is required for all couplers; all couplers shall be tagged with a mark
Page: 6 of 13
which is relevant to the mill test certificate provided.

5. The strength of the coupled bar in tension shall exceed 1.25Fy (125% of the yield
strength of the bar) and 100% of the ultimate tensile strength of the reinforcement bars
and bar break. In compression, required only to develop at least 125% of specified yield
strength Fy of the reinforcing bar.
6. Grip type couplers shall not be allowed for columns, beams and walls.
7. Couplers shall not be allowed in place of lapping for columns, walls and beams unless
indicated in the drawing otherwise.
8. Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s recommendation for the torque to be applied for
the moment couplers and each coupler fixing shall be tested for the required torque
using calibrated digital torque wrench.
9. Couplers shall be tested as required by Engineer in accordance with ASTM A370
a. Prior to installation in the permanent works, 3 tests of each coupler size and type to
be used are to be completed by an approved independent testing laboratory with
results submitted for review and approval by the engineer. Failure of any one of
these tests will result in the immediate testing of no less than 25 couplers from the
failed batch to determine if manufacturing defects exist.
b. Once initial testing is successfully completed and couplers are approved for use in
the permanent works, 1 sample for every 200 couplers of each type shall be tested.
C. Rip Boxes and Pullout Bars
1. Rip boxes shall be of approved make and size, and shall be provided only with the
written approval of the Engineer. These shall be tied securely to the wall reinforcements
at the correct level and on the face of the formwork. The overall of width of the rip box
shall be 20mm less than the thickness of the slab. When the wall concrete is cut to
open the rip boxes, Contractor shall ensure that a grinder cut is made at 10mm below
(above) the slab top (bottom) and then the concrete between these grinder cuts are
removed to pull out the rebars.
2. The pull out bars shall be tested for rebend tests as instructed by the Engineer.
D. Rebar Anchoring with Epoxy Resin
1. No rebars shall be fixed with the epoxy resin (chemical anchor) without approval.
Engineer shall assess the criticality of the structure while considering the use of epoxy
resin for anchorage requirements as well as fire resistance requirements.
2. Epoxy resin from only reputed manufacturers such as Hilti (HIT-HY200 or RE 500 V3)
or Fischer (FIS) shall be allowed to be used. The Contractor shall submit the design
calculations for the embedment lengths depending upon the site conditions (edge
distance, rebar congestion, spacing, concrete grade etc). Full yield strength shall be
developed for the rebars. The system shall be fire rated for a minimum of 90 minutes
and creep effects on the resin shall be clearly stated. Accessories used for drilling,
cleaning the dust etc. shall be proprietary from the manufacturer.
E. Spacers & chairs
1. Adequate spacers, chairs and other approved supports shall be provided as necessary
to maintain the reinforcement in its correct position.
2. Only factory made premium grade fibre reinforced concrete spacer blocks complying
with BS 7973 shall be permitted. Minimum strength of concrete spacer blocks shall be
50MPa. Site made spacer blocks shall not be permitted.
3. Circular spacers of appropriate diameter shall be used for pile cages.
4. Spacer blocks shall be cured for a minimum of 7 days before delivering to site
5. Spacers to formed concrete finishes/ architectural walls shall be of approved type(s).
6. The tolerance on the spacer dimension providing the cover shall be ±1 mm for
covers/heights up to 75 mm and ±2 mm for larger cover/heights over 75 mm
7. The tolerance on the chair dimensions providing the cover or the specified height shall
be ±2 mm
Page: 7 of 13
8. Spacers and chairs arrangement shall comply with BS 7973-2:2001.

9. When chairs are of heights exceeding 500mm and or are required to carry heavy
reinforcements, Contractor shall design the chairs (shape, size and spacing) to
adequately support the additional requirements. Shop drawings shall include the details
of these chairs.
10. Chairs used to support PT ducts shall have plastic coated legs
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication of rebar shall be in compliance with CRSI MSP and ACI 315-99. Rebar shall be
bent at temperatures of at least 5°C and not exceeding 100°C
B. Rebars shall be shop fabricated unless agreed by the Engineer otherwise.
C. Rebars shall not be rebent or straightened after bending. Pull out bars of 12mm diameter
and below may be allowed to be bent at Engineer’s discretion. In case of fabrication errors
the rebars shall not be rebent or straightened in a manner that will affect the properties of
rebars.
D. Fabricated rebars shall be delivered to site and stored properly to prevent contaminations.
E. Location of splices other than those indicated on the Shop Drawings shall be subject to
review by the Engineer and shall, for beams and slabs, be away from points of maximum
stress.
F. Tolerances on cutting and bending reinforcing shall be in accordance with CRSI MSP and
ACI 117.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine work upon which this Work Section depends. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory
conditions.
B. On arrival at the Site, the steel shall be inspected by the Engineer for rusting, contamination,
surface defects, and damage before it is accepted.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D. For each source of supply and for each bar diameter (minimum 3 specimens for each bar
diameter) shall be tested and the test results are to be submitted for Engineer approval. The
required tests are as mentioned below:
1. Tension test (yield and ultimate).

2. Elongation.
3. Cross sectional area.
4. Chemical analysis.
5. Bend and rebend test.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Reinforcing bars
1. At the time of placing concrete, reinforcement shall be clean and free of cement slurry,
corrosive pitting, loose millscale, loose rust, ice, oil and other substances which may
Page: 8 of 13
adversely affect the reinforcement, concrete, or bond between the two. Previously
applied rebar protection coating if any shall be removed using mechanical wire brush
and jet washing with water. Rusted/ scaled rebars shall be rejected.
2. If the surface condition of the reinforcing deteriorates such that it is not in accordance
with the requirements stated above, the reinforcing shall be cleaned or dealt with by
other methods to the acceptance of the Engineer. This shall be applicable for the rebars
installed under any previous Contract by a different Contractor such as pile rebars etc.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Place reinforcing within the following tolerances:

a. For Clear Protection of Reinforcing: ±5mm.
b. Lateral spacing of bars shall be within ± 25mm of the specified spacing.
c. For Longitudinal Location of Bends and Ends of Bars, ±50mm Except
Discontinuous Ends: ±20mm.
2. Fix reinforcement in position before placing concrete. In addition to any spacers and
chairs shown on drawing or schedules, provide adequate support, tie securely and
maintain the specified cover.
3. All materials shall be clean and free of all deleterious material. All deleterious material
shall be removed in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
4. Any reinforcing which has become corroded or pitted to an extent which in the opinion of
the Engineer shall substantially affect its properties of its long term durability shall be
removed from the Site.
5. Reinforcing shall be covered and shall be wetted immediately prior to placement of
concrete.
6. No rebar shall be bent or distorted for whatsoever reasons. Where it is agreed by the
Engineer to bend rebar, the same shall be bent with a radius not less than 4 times the
diameter. Residual kinks shall not be left when these rebars are straightened.
7. Structural rebars shall not be used to support service installations unless approved
otherwise. Where rebars (structural or additional) are used to support the services
without adequate cover, the rebar must be coated with approved epoxy compound.
8. Prevent damage to and disfigurement of forms, form linings and adjacent work.
B. Laps or Splices
1. Obtain instructions if details are not shown on drawings. Mechanical splices shall not be
used unless the Engineer agrees otherwise in writing.
2. Unless specified otherwise on the drawings laps in nominal bar reinforcement to be a
minimum of 300mm or fifty diameters, or in accordance with ACI-318 requirements.
whichever is the greater.
3. Laps in fabric reinforcement, where not detailed, to be a minimum of 300mm. Where
necessary seek instructions to avoid a four layer build-up at corners.
4. All reinforcement shall be furnished in the full lengths indicated on the Drawings.
Splicing of bars, except where shown on the Drawings, shall not be permitted without the
written approval of the Consultant. Splices shall be staggered as far as possible.
5. For pile reinforcements where galvanised steel clamps are approved, a minimum of 3
clamps shall be used per lap. These clamps shall be fitted in such a way that the bolt/
nuts shall not project in the clear cover zone.
C. Welding
Page: 9 of 13
1. Reinforcing shall not be welded except where required by the Conditions of Contract or
to the acceptance of the Engineer. If the welding is employed, the procedures shall be as
set out in AWS D1.4. Full strength butt welds shall only be used for steel complying with
BS 4449. If high yield deformed bars require welding, they shall have a carbon
equivalent of the steel less than 0.51%, and a nitrogen content less than 0.007%.
D. Contact Between Dissimilar Metals
1. Where concrete members contain galvanized or stainless steel reinforcing, or embedded

items as well as ordinary uncoated mild or high-yield steel reinforcing, then contact
between dissimilar metals shall be prevented, if necessary by inserting electrically
insulating material between them.
E. Starter Bars
1. Starter bars shall be protected from wind blown dust, sand and sea salts by wrapping
with an agreed and approved system.
F. Cover
1. The required cover specified on the Design Drawings is the minimum clear cover.
2. Nominal cover is the design depth of concrete cover to all steel reinforcing, including
links (stirrups). The sizes of spacers and the dimensions of all reinforcing shall be based
on this nominal cover. The fixing of reinforcing and formwork shall also be such as to
maintain the nominal cover.
3. The actual concrete cover to all steel reinforcing shall not be less than the required
nominal minimum cover.
4. Cover shall be maintained to all embedded fixings, conduits and at all chases and
pockets. This include galvanized proprietary construction joint materials such as Hi-Rib
also.
5. Unless indicated otherwise in the drawings, following minimum cover shall be applicable
a. The cover to the reinforcement in the piles shall be 75mm minimum.
b. For pile caps, ground beams and ,raft slabs and other substructure elements, the
cover shall be 75mm minimum
c. For all other structural elements, the minimum cover shall be 65 mm minimum earth
face and 50mm.
d. For walls and columns 40 mm.
G. Spacers & chairs
1. Spacers, and chairs, together with such other supports as may be necessary, shall be
used to maintain the reinforcing in its correct position. In a member where the nominal
cover is dimensioned to the links, spacers between the link and the formwork
shall be the same dimension as the nominal cover.
2. The position of reinforcing shall be checked before and during concreting, particular
attention being paid to the position of top reinforcing in cantilever sections.
3. Joining two spacer blocks to achieve cover or to strengthen cover blocks shall not be
permitted
4. When the spacer blocks will have to carry heavy reinforcements, the number of spacer
blocks shall be increased to adequately support all loads including construction loads.
H. Embedded Items
1. All embedded items indicated on the Design Drawings shall be fastened in the
positions indicated within the specified tolerances.
Page: 10 of 13
2. Where this necessitates the modification or displacement of the reinforcing, the

proposals for such work shall be reviewed by the Engineer.
3. Embedded items shall not be supported by welding to reinforcing.
I. Dowel Bars
1. Where indicated on the Design Drawings, dowel bars shall be debonded with an agreed
debonding compound or proprietary dowel bar sleeve. The Engineer may require a
demonstration to ascertain the efficiency of the method of debonding by carrying out the
test described below.
2. The average bond stress on debonded bars cast into concrete specimens and subjected
to the pull out tests at 7 days shall not exceed 1.4MN/ m² and the total movement of
dowel bar relative to the concrete shall be not less than 0.25mm at the stress.
The concrete specimens shall be 150mm x 150mm in section and 450mm long and
made with the same mix proportions as used in the work. The number of tests shall be at
the discretion of the Engineer.
3. Compressible Caps: Caps shall be securely fixed and shall permit free movement of one
end of the bar.
4. Workmanship: Dowel bars shall be rigidly supported ensuring that they shall be correctly
aligned.
J. Rust Staining
1. Prevent rust staining of surfaces of concrete which will be exposed to view in the finished
work, caused by e.g. rust stained formwork or unprotected projecting reinforcement.
A. Provide the Engineer with certified copies of mill test reports for reinforcing steel a minimum
of 21-days prior to commencing reinforcing work, showing physical and chemical analysis.
B. Inform the Engineer of proposed source of material to be supplied.
C. Two copies of certificates verifying that the reinforcing complies with this Specification shall
be given to the Engineer in accordance with the British Standard as appropriate for each
consignment of reinforcing from each source.
3.5 PROTECTION OF REBAR
A. General
1. Where the Contractor is required to leave reinforcement bars (starter bars or other bars)
exposed for follow on Contractor’s Works, he shall apply the protection coating to rebars
as per this section.
B. Performance and Warranty requirements
1. All steel bar protection materials shall be able to provide protection to rebars against the
following elements for a minimum period of 1 year from the date of Taking Over
Certificate, or as specified by the Engineer.
a. High temperature and high seasonal changes.
b. High humidity and high change in relative humidity.
c. Strong drying winds.
d. Condensation at night.
e. Windborne salt-laden dust*.
f. High solar radiation (UV damage).
Page: 11 of 13
2. A full warranty, including coverage of installation, shall be provided explicitly stating the
duration of the guarantee of corrosion protection over the specified period. The warranty
shall be deemed to have taken all necessary considerations of the local environment,
site specific environmental conditions and information relating to chloride and sulphate
contents and ph values for ground and water samples as provided in the site
investigation report. Other details included in the site investigation data/ site investigation
report. The product supplier shall carry out any additional testing, where necessary, to
ensure the suitability of the system over the period specified under the warranty. The
manufacturer/supplier of the steel bar protection material shall be approved by the
Engineer.
C. Material
1. This product shall be a cement based polymer modified primer. The warranty for this
system shall be for a period of no less than 12 months. During these 12 months, the
rebar shall not exhibit any sign of rusting, discoloration or any other defects.
D. Application
1. The protective system shall be installed by a specialist applicator which is approved by

the product manufacturer.
2. In all cases, the system shall be applied, including pre-treatment of the exposed
reinforcement, strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. It shall be a
requirement that the manufacturer of the product shall inspect the application of the
system, and confirm satisfaction with the following elements
a. Correct preparation of the reinforcement surface immediately prior to application of
the system.
b. Correct mixing and preparation of the product.
c. Correct application of the product to the reinforcement bars.
E. Pre-treatment
1. Pre-treatment shall be carried out as per manufacturer’s instructions following

inspections by the manufacturer. As a minimum rebars shall be cleaned thoroughly using
mechanical wire brush followed by water jet wash. All cement slurry, corrosive pitting,
loose mill scale, loose rust, oil and other substances which may adversely affect the
reinforcement, concrete, or bond between the two shall be removed completely. The
surface preparation shall be approved by the Engineer prior to proceeding with coating.
F. Application
1. The coating compound shall be mixed properly as per the recommendations of the
manufacturer. Pot life if applicable shall not be exceeded. The coating shall be applied
with the manufacturers’ recommended method.
G. Re-application
1. Should the protective system need to be re-applied after a certain period as advised
by the manufacturer, then this shall be carried out as per the manufacturer’s
instructions. The treatment shall include full cleaning of the bar surface prior to re-
application, with particular care taken to ensure that all salts such as chlorides and
sulphates are removed from the surface.
H. Post treatment
1. When the permanent works resume, and immediately prior to casting the new permanent
concrete, the coating shall be cleaned of any salts (chlorides and sulphates) and any
debris, oils or other substances which may affect the bond with the new concrete by the
follow on Contractor. This treatment and surface preparation shall be as per the
Page: 12 of 13
manufacturer’s instructions to receive the permanent concrete with adequate bond to the
coating system. The treatment shall include roughening of the surface of the coating.
I. Where coring/ cutting is done in cast concrete exposing the end of the rebars (subject to
Employer/ Engineer’s Representative’s approval), the exposed rebar ends must be coated
with approved epoxy protection paint.
J. Where cut-outs are left in the structural members without cutting rebars for service
penetrations, the exposed rebars shall be protected with approved epoxy based protection
paint.
END OF SECTION
Page: 13 of 13
WSP | Parsons Brinckerhoff Section 033500 Concrete Finishing
SECTION 033500 – CONCRETE FINISHING.............................................................................................. 2

PART 1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1 SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................... 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................. 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................ 5
2.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................... 5
PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................... 7
3.1 EXAMINATION ............................................................................................................................... 7
3.2 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 7
3.3 FORMED FINISHES....................................................................................................................... 7
3.4 SPECIAL FINISHES ....................................................................................................................... 8
3.5 WORKED FINISHES ...................................................................................................................... 8
Page: 1 of 10
SECTION 033500 – CONCRETE FINISHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Read this work section in conjunction with other related work sections, Division 01 General
Requirements, the Contract Drawings and Specifications and Conditions of Contract.
2. Read this work Section in conjunction with the Project Specific movement and tolerances
report, if appropriate.
3. Read this work section in conjunction with architectural design drawings and specifications
to establish any special concrete formwork & finishes requirements.

2. 032000 Concrete Reinforcing
3. 031100 Concrete Forming
a. . Cast-in-place concrete finishing
b. Concrete surface repairs

authority to obtain building permits.
the Employer.
A. General:
1. Refer to all relevant ASTM International and ACI Standards for this Work Section. Where
there is no relevant ASTM or ACI standard the Contractor is to make reference to the
relevant British Standard.
a. Alternate standards may be proposed to the Engineer for consideration. The Engineer
shall be the sole judge as to whether the proposed standards adequately support the
Design Intent.
Page: 2 of 10
2. Governing Local Authority rules and regulations & HSE requirements

4. Building regulations and design guidelines – Structural Grey Book – Trakhees (if applicable)
5. Structural regulations for Buildings – 2010, Tecom regulations (DTMFZA) (if applicable)
6. Employer’s HSE requirements as per the Contract Documents as applicable
7. Refer to Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete for the references for all relevant ASTM,
ACI and BS standards and guidance documents not listed below.
8. ASTM C309 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane: Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete.
9. ASTM C156 Standard Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials.
10. ACI-116 latest edition, Cement and Concrete terminology
11. ACI-121 latest edition, QA Systems for Concrete Construction
12. ACI-SP-15, ACI 301 Field Reference Manual
13. ACI 311, latest edition Guide for inspection of Concrete
Where there is a discrepancy between the standards; standards and specification; standards,
specification & proprietary formwork system requirements; more restrictive provisions and
recommendations shall be followed.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with the requirements of Section 013300 Submittal Procedures and
submit the following.
B. Post Contract Samples
1. Representative 600x600mm samples of the material proposed for concrete finishing shall
be supplied by the Contractor for the acceptance of the Engineer.
2. Rough finish for buried work, External not in contact with the ground.
a. A sample of the formwork to be used shall be submitted to the Engineer for review
and comment.
3. Normal fair-face finish, Internal and External not in contact with the ground: Formed.
a. A sample of the formwork to be used shall be submitted to the Engineer for review
and comment.
4. Fine and superfine concrete finish: Formed.
a. Prepare for review and comment a sample panel 4m² on face and 150mm in thickness,
cast in two lifts, showing the finished concrete surface, including a horizontal construc-
tion joint. When agreed, the sample shall form the standard which shall be maintained
throughout the contract.
C. Submit for review by the Engineer all and Shop Drawings and calculations for the entirety of
work associated with concrete finishing.
A. Coordination
Page: 3 of 10
shall be responsible for coordinating with the Architect of Record and agreeing the required
surface finishes for the concrete works for the project.
1. All Submittals & Trial panels shall be approved by the Engineer prior to execution of the
works.
2. Contractor shall submit CVs of the relevant personnel responsible for the concreting works
and shall be a minimum of a specialist who has at least 5 years' successful experience in
performing similar work.
3. Work of this Work Section shall be executed by a I S O 9 0 0 1 a c c r e d i t e d company that
has adequate equipment and skilled tradesmen, and shall have been responsible for
satisfactory installations similar to that specified.
A. Storage
B. Handling: Comply with the governing local authority health and safety regulations
C. Perform work only when environmental conditions are as specified or suitable. No

concreting shall take place during periods of inclement weather including storms and dust
storms. Provide adequate moisture, sun shades and wind barriers to prevent rapid drying of
concrete during hot weather.
Page: 4 of 10
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Appearance Durability
1. The concrete shall not develop cracks, chips, pits or erosion or soiling due to frost,
temperature changes, or wind and rain.
2. The concrete shall not develop oxidation, corrosion, sulfate attack or efflorescence
attributable to a chemical reaction with water, elements within the atmosphere or the
constituents of the material.
3. The concrete shall not discolor, stain or develop biological growth attributable to wet
conditions or particular light levels.
4. The concrete shall not develop staining attributable to leaching of the constituent materials
or water run-off from adjacent components.
5. The concrete shall not develop color variations in adjacent panels beyond the specified
requirements.
6. The concrete shall not develop staining or unsightly weathering attributable to surface water
running resulting from inappropriate design and detailing.
B. Slip Resistance
1. When tested using the TRL Pendulum Tester, walkable screed types, inclusive of surface
treatment, shall achieve the following pendulum test value (PTV):
a. Dry: Not less than 40PTV.
b. Wet: Not less than 40PTV.
2. When tested using the surface roughness meter, walkable screed types shall achieve the
following surface roughness (Rz) value:
a. Not less than 20µm Rz.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Sustainability
assembly.
B. Form Release Agents: refer to section 031100 Concrete Forming
C. Curing: Sealing Compound.
1. Concrete curing shall be with a water based, solar reflective film forming, degradable
membrane, in accordance with the following minimum standards:
a. Drying time to ASTM C309 Clause 10.3 : 2 hours 45 minutes.
b. Water retention to ASTM C156: Pass.
c. ASTM C309 Type 2 Class A.
d. CRD: C-300 – Specifications for membrane forming compounds for curing Concrete
e. British DOT Clause 2709 Road 78 Bridge Works.
Page: 5 of 10
f. British DOT Standard clauses for Airfield Pavement Works Part 3 Appendix 3B
Spec.
g. Manufactured by an ISO 9001 accredited company.
Page: 6 of 10
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
B. Proceed with the works only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 GENERAL
1. Refer to architectural drawings and specifications for confirmation of finishes required to

each Concrete section of the project
2. Carry out all finishing at optimum times in relation to the setting and hardening of the
concrete. Do not wet surfaces of concrete to assist surface working. Do not sprinkle cement
on to surface.
3.3 FORMED FINISHES
A. Concrete Finishing: General
1. All Columns without plaster shall be fair face finish unless noted otherwise
2. All Concrete surface to receive plaster finishes are to be hacked to provide adequate
surface key.
B. Rough Formed Finish
1. Provide a rough-formed finish for formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the
finished Work or concealed by other construction.
2. Concrete surface texture is that imparted by form facing material used, with tie holes and
defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 6mm in
height rubbed down or chipped off.
3. Where waterproofing membranes are applied to the finished surface, then sharp projections
shall be required to be completely removed and also specific requirements of the
waterproofing Manufacturer shall be met so as to avoid damage to the membrane.
C. Smooth-Formed/Fair Faced Finish
1. Provide a smooth-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces exposed to view or to be

covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, as such waterproofing, damp-
proofing, veneer plaster, painting, or another similar system .
2. This is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing material, arranged in
an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective
areas with fins and other projections completely removed and smooth. No ledges shall be
permitted at the position of joints in the formwork.
D. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth formed finished as concrete where indicated:
1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete
surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color
and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.
2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint
to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part Portland cement to one and one-half parts
fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white Portland cement in
amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces.
Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean
burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.
3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part Portland
cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white
Page: 7 of 10
Portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match
adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish
surface with a cork float.
3.4 SPECIAL FINISHES
A. Please refer to separate section, if relevant to the project, on exposed Architectural in-situ
Concrete finishes.
3.5 WORKED FINISHES
A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Scratch finish
1. While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or
darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to finish surface to tolerance of F(F) 15 (floor
flatness) and F(L) 13 (floor levelness) measured in accordance with ASTM E 1155M. Slope
surface uniformly to drains where required. After levelling, roughen before final set with stuff
brushes, brooms, or rakes.
a. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete floor
screed/topping or mortar setting beds and other bonded cementitious floor finishes.
C. Float finish
1. After screeding, consolidating, and levelling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready
for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has
disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven
floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is
small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 18 (floor flatness)
and F(L) 15 (floor levelness) measured in accordance with ASTM E 1155M. Cut down high
spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after levelling,
refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
a. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor
and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing.
b. Depending upon the Concrete Mix Design, power floating may not always be possible to
certain types of mixes with special admixtures and cement replacement materials. Con-
tractor shall ensure that power floating can be done without affecting the integrity of
freshly laid concrete.
2. For areas such as warehouse etc., float concrete to an even surface with no ridges or steps,
then immediately commence curing. Apply hardener / sprinkle finish as required.
Successively hand or power trowel at intervals, applying sufficient pressure to close the
surface, to give a uniform smooth finish free from trowel marks and other blemishes.
D. Trowel Finish
1. After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or
power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph trough applied coating or floor coverings. The finished surface shall be to
tolerance in accordance with ASTM E 1155 of the following;
a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and levelness, F(L) 25 for slabs on grade.
b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and levelness, F(L) 20 work suspended
slabs.
c. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an un-
levelled freestanding 3.00m long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed an-
Page: 8 of 10
ywhere on the surface, does not exceed 4mm.

2. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or
to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, paint or another thin film-finish coating system.
This finish is also applicable to top of buried foundations.
3. Floor Edges at Expansion Joints: Tool edges minimum 10mm.
E. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish
1. Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to surfaces indicated and to
surfaces where ceramic is to be installed by thin set method. Immediately after second
troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
F. Broom Finish
1. Apply a broom finish to concrete ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

a. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fi-
ber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.
G. Dewatered Trowelled Finish (Warehouse floors)
1. Immediately after compaction of the concrete, apply the vacuum dewatering process in
accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Without delay, float the surface using a power float to give an even surface with no ridges or
steps, then immediately commence curing. Apply hardener / sprinkle finish as required.
3. Successively hand or power trowel at intervals, applying sufficient pressure to close the
surface, to give a uniform smooth finish free from trowel marks and other blemishes.
H. General
1. Carry out all finishing at optimum times in relation to the setting and hardening of the
concrete. Do not wet surfaces of concrete to assist surface working. Do not sprinkle cement
on to surface.
2. Resume specified curing without delay.
3. Protect the surface from construction traffic until flooring material is laid.
4. If, because of inadequate finishing or protection, the surface of the concrete is not suitable
to receive the specified epoxy based flooring material, it must be made good by application
of a smoothing compound by and to the satisfaction of the flooring subcontractor. Allow for
the cost of any such making good.
5. Complete a sample area of the finished work, size 20 sq.m., in advance of the remainder, in
an approved location, and obtain approval of appearance before proceeding.
6. Post pour checks must be carried out for defects, alignment issues etc. within 48 hours of
casting concrete which shall be offered for inspection by Engineer/ Engineer’s Assistants.
I. Cleaning and Adjusting
1. Patching and Refinishing: Before completion of project, patch and refinish defective surfaces
to match surrounding areas with no discernible variation in appearance , in accordance
with the Engineer’s instructions.
J. Protection
1. Ensure that finished concrete floor areas shall be protected from abrasion from foot or
wheeled traffic, and from damage caused by spillage of oil or other harmful materials. Note
and observe any load restrictions imposed by the design and stated on the Design
Drawings.
Page: 9 of 10
END OF SECTION
Page: 10 of 10
STANDARD SPECIFICATION Div. 33 – Shotcrete/Guniting Works
WSP | Parsons Brinckerhoff Section – 033713 Sprayed Concrete (Shotcrete/ Guniting) Works
SECTION –33713 SPRAYED CONCRETE (SHOTCRETE/ GUNITING) WORKS – NON STRUCTURAL

APPLICATIONS ........................................................................................................................................... 2
PART 1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1 DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS .......................................................................................................... 2
1.3 APPLICATION OF SHOTCRETE ON ELEMENTS CAST BY OTHERS ....................................... 2
PART 2 MIX REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................ 2
2.1 CONCRETE INGREDIENTS .......................................................................................................... 2
PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................... 3
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION ............................................................................................................ 3
3.2 WEATHER CONDITIONS .............................................................................................................. 3
3.3 SEQUENCE .................................................................................................................................... 3
3.4 WORKING PLATFORM.................................................................................................................. 3
3.5 SURVEYING AND ALIGNMENT CONTROL ................................................................................. 3
3.6 SPRAYING MACHINERY AND DELIVERY PIPES ....................................................................... 3
3.7 PROTECTION ................................................................................................................................ 4
3.8 WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................................................ 4
3.9 TOLERANCES ............................................................................................................................... 4
3.10 CURING .......................................................................................................................................... 4
3.12 POST SHOTCRETE SURVEY ....................................................................................................... 5
3.13 WARRANTY ................................................................................................................................... 5
Page: 1 of 5
SECTION –33713 SPRAYED CONCRETE (SHOTCRETE/ GUNITING) WORKS –

NON STRUCTURAL APPLICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies application of shotcrete to secant/ contiguous piles and diaphragm walls to
produce a smooth, even surface to receive subsequent waterproofing membrane. The
application shall be wet-mix shotcrete. This specification describes the requirements for
materials, proportioning and application of shotcrete.
1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A. ACI 506.2-95 Specification for Shotcrete
B. In addition, recommendations of following reference standards shall be followed for the design,
construction and inspection of shotcrete works
1. ACI 506.4R_94 Evaluation of In-Place Shotcrete

2. ACI 506R Guide to Shotcrete
1.3 APPLICATION OF SHOTCRETE ON ELEMENTS CAST BY OTHERS
A. Where the Contract requires the Contractor to apply shotcrete on previously formed surfaces
(secant piles/ contiguous piles/ diaphragm walls/ other surfaces) by others, the Contractor shall
carry out site visit and study the existing surfaces. The Contractor shall be deemed to have
allowed in his cost, remedial works, additional thickness of shotcrete if applicable, correcting
variations in alignments, chipping concrete projections, cleaning etc. complete and no claims
shall be admitted for the failure to do so.
PART 2 MIX REQUIREMENTS

2.1 CONCRETE INGREDIENTS
A. Properties of all the mix ingredients for the sprayed concrete works shall comply with section
030000: Concrete General specification.
B. Sprayed concrete mix shall meet the following requirements.
Elements and Class of Concrete / Properties Mix Design Requirements

Characteristic Compressive Strength @ 28 days, MPa 30
Cement Type SRPC
3
Minimum Cementing Materials (CM) Content, kg/m 350
3
Maximum Cementing Materials (CM) Content, kg/m 450
Maximum Slump, (mm) 150 ± 25 mm
Maximum free W/C Ratio 0.45
C. Readymix concrete mix shall be used for the shotcrete works, unless approved otherwise by the
Engineer. Requirements of Readymix plant, concrete mix, supply etc., shall comply with section
030000.
Page: 2 of 5
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Remove all deteriorated, loose unsound material or contaminants, mud or other foreign materials
that may inhibit bonding. Chip areas to be repaired to remove offsets causing abrupt changes in
thickness. Pre damp the surface with clean water prior to the commencement of the works.
3.2 WEATHER CONDITIONS
A. Concrete shall not be sprayed on a dry surface and the substrate temperature shall not exceed
35oC. Follow section 030000 for requirements of hot weather concreting. If wind causes
separation of ingredients during shooting, the nozzle stream shall be shielded properly.
3.3 SEQUENCE
A. Works shall be done from top to bottom unless agreed by the Engineer otherwise.
3.4 WORKING PLATFORM
A. Provide a platform that permits the nozzleman unobstructed access to the receiving surface.
Scaffolding works shall be erected on firm levelled ground, properly braced, designed to handle
the mechanical and manual loading complete. The erection shall be certified by an approved
Safety Engineer prior to start of the works.
3.5 SURVEYING AND ALIGNMENT CONTROL
A. A comprehensive as built survey of contiguous piles/ diaphragm walls shall be carried out. The
deviation from theoretical positions both horizontally and vertically shall be marked up on an as
built drawing. A proposed shotcrete line shall be marked allowing a minimum of 50mm thickness.
The shotcrete line shall be parallel to the basement retaining wall line. The shotcrete line shall
not project beyond the retaining wall line plus an allowance of 10mm for the installation of
waterproofing system. Where the piles/ diaphragm walls do not allow a minimum of50mm
shotcrete plus 10mm allowance for waterproofing works (out of tolerance construction), the
Contractor shall be responsible for the corrective actions which may include cutting concrete
subject to structural design approvals and compliance with durability requirements. Shotcrete
works shall be proceeded only upon the approval of the above survey drawings.
B. Install taut guide wires and depth spacers to establish thickness and plane of required surface.
Install taut guide wires at corners or offsets not established by forms. Use cement level tips
where required.
3.6 SPRAYING MACHINERY AND DELIVERY PIPES
A. Pumping and delivery equipment shall be specifically designed for sprayed concrete works and
should be capable of maintaining an even and continuous flow of material to the nozzle. The
equipment shall be inspected and cleaned at least twice a day.
B. Delivery and hose pipes shall be inspected before laying out to ensure they are clean and that
coupling end rings are not damaged. Coupling and seals should be in good condition. Delivery
hoses shall be laid out prior to the commencement of work and during the course of the work
shall be maintained without kinks or sharp bends.
Page: 3 of 5
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect surfaces not intended for shotcrete placement or previously finished works against
deposit of rebound and overspray or impact from nozzle stream.
3.8 WORKMANSHIP
A. Concrete spraying works shall be carried out by an approved specialist sub-contractor. A

competent nozzleman with not less than two years of similar work experience shall be employed.
B. The nozzle shall be held at a distance between 600 and 1500 mm from the shotcrete receiving
surface unless agreed otherwise by Engineer.
C. Place shotcrete with nozzle held approximately perpendicular to the receiving surface. In
corners, direct nozzle at approximately 45o angle or bisect the corner angle. Place shotcrete first
in corners, recesses and other areas where rebound or overspray cannot escape easily.
Remove rebound and overspray from previously prepared surfaces prior to shotcrete placement.
Shotcrete shall be applied in such a way that sagging and sloughing do not occur.
D. Rebound and overspray materials shall not be reused.
E. Minimum thickness of the shotcrete shall be 50mm. Where the maximum thickness exceeds
250mm or a thickness which causes sagging and slumping whichever is less, spraying will have
to be done in two layers and the Contractor shall organise the works accordingly. When the
shotcrete is done in two layers or more, surface preparation of previous layer shall comply with
clause 3.1 above. The first surface shall be broom finished to increase bond.
F. Construction joint shall be tapered at 45o angle. Joints shall be properly cleaned and wetted with
water before starting the next application.
G. Once the spraying is completed the surface shall be trowelled with wood float finish to achieve a
smooth, uniform, even surface.
3.9 TOLERANCES
A. Flatness measured with a 3m straight edge shall not exceed 10mm. The maximum departure
from the agreed/ specified plane shall not exceed +/- 10mm. Abrupt changes across joints shall
not exceed +/- 5mm
3.10 CURING
A. Shotcrete surface shall be cured with curing compound or water for a period of seven days.
Curing compound shall be compatible where subsequent shotcrete layers are to be applied.
Please refer section 030000 Concreting- General for curing compound requirements.
A. Concrete cubes shall be taken at regular intervals and tested in an accredited and approved
independent laboratory. Submit recent cube results along with mix design submittal. As a
minimum, prepare one set of cubes at the start of the shotcrete works. Subsequent rate of
sampling shall be one set of cubes for every 1000 sqm shotcrete area or one set of cubes in a
day whichever is higher. One set of cubes shall consist of 4 cubes, 2 cubes each shall be tested
on 7 and 28 days. Refer to section 03000 for further requirements.
Page: 4 of 5
3.12 POST SHOTCRETE SURVEY
A. Contractor shall carry out a post shotcrete survey for the horizontal and vertical alignment and
submit as-built drawing for the same. The surface shall be checked for honeycombs, cracks and
other defects. All out of tolerance surfaces and defects shall be rectified prior to taking over of
works. As built survey shall be carried out prior to removing the working platform.
B. Final as built drawing shall be submitted in hard and soft copies.
3.13 WARRANTY
A. The shotcrete works shall be warrantied against delamination, cracking, and other defects for a
period of one year from the date of taking over certificate.
END OF SECTION
Page: 5 of 5
STANDARD SPECIFICATION Div. 03 – Concrete
WSP | Parsons Brinckerhoff Section 033800 – Post Tensioned Slab
SECTION 03 3800 P O S T TENSIONED CONCRETE ................................................................................ 2

PART 1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1 SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................. 4
1.3 CLOSEOUT .................................................................................................................................... 5
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ...................................................................................... 6
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ................................................................................................. 7
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................... 7
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING .............................................................................................. 7
PART 2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................ 8
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................................. 8
2.2 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................... 9
2.3 ACCESSORIES ............................................................................................................................ 10
2.4 FABRICATION .............................................................................................................................. 10
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL ................................................................................................... 10
PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................. 10
3.1 EXAMINATION ............................................................................................................................. 10
3.2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................ 11
3.5 PROTECTION .............................................................................................................................. 15
Page: 1 of 16
SECTION 03 3800 POST TENSIONED CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Read this Section in conjunction with the Design Drawings, other Related Sections and other
relevant documents.
B. Technical Requirements
1. The following Clause identifies the major areas for which Contractors design / design
development is required. This specification section is to be read in its entirety for other areas
where Contractor design / design development is required.
2. Major Areas for Contractor Design / Design Development
a. The Contractor shall provide a design warranty and Professional Indemnity insurance
for all Post Tensioned elements, and shall hold a hold valid trade license with the local
authority for both design and construction of PT structures.
b. All post-tensioning work shall be carried out under the supervision of properly qualified
personnel, who shall exercise rigid controls over all operations under this Contract. All
works shall be completed in strict conformance with the requirements of the specifica-
tions and the structural drawings
c. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and construction of the post-
tensioned floor system including beams and any RC beams shown in the design draw-
ings on generally PT floors in accordance with the Contract Documents and in compli-
ance with all relevant ACI and ASTM codes and standards. This specification relates to
the design and construction of bonded post-tensioned elements.
d. The PT specialist shall be responsible for the PT floor slab design in its entirety includ-
ing design for gravity loads, seismic/wind moments and thermal stresses in compliance
with local authority requirements. Lateral loads should be taken from the building
ETABS model that will be provided to the PT design specialist. The most economical
design has to be produced in relation to PT quantities (Kg/m2) and rebar rates (Kg/m3).
The design has to be based on load combination; the overlay of rebar from different load
cases is not accepted.
e. The Contractor, his specialist PT sub-contractor and his specialist PT designer shall be
responsible for obtaining all authority approvals. Contractor shall submit the required
number of hard/soft copy documents in the Authority specified format, duly stamped and
signed. Delays arising in Authority approval or Authority initiated design changes shall
not be basis for claims of whatsoever nature. All submission to DM shall be through the
consultant. No drawings can be uploaded to DM without Engineers approval. The num-
ber of submissions that can be made to authorities shall be restricted and shall be at
Employer/Engineer’s sole discretion.
f. The minimum member thickness, minimum rebar requirements etc. shall be compliant
with the relevant standards and specifications for the project and local authority re-
quirements. The thickness shown in the design drawings are the minimum thickness to
be followed and additional thickness if required shall be provided at no additional cost to
the Employer, following approval by the Engineer.
g. The PT designer shall provide relevant information to the Contractor and his formwork
designer about additional load points if any to be applied on the formwork system at
stressing stage. Redistribution of the slab weight due to the lifting of post-tensioned slab
off the formwork should be considered. The trapping of formwork between two vertical
faces of a down stand due to the longitudinal shortening of post-tensioned elements
should be considered in formwork design. The anchorage pockets formed with polysty-
rene blocks shall not be acceptable. Approved proprietary anchorage blocks shall be
Page: 2 of 16
used. Top-stressing with anchor pockets are essential to PT slabs and must be allowed
for, but with the same anchor system.
h. The Contractor is responsible for the coordination of all builders-work details including
but not limited to, architectural upstands, curbs, MEP openings / recesses, cast in in-
serts for cladding support details, Steel to concrete connections as provided by the spe-
cialist steelwork contractor, secondary fixing details for lift shaft beams, escalator sup-
port brackets. The contractor should account the effect of the above in the design and
detailing of the PT slab. Embedded conduits shall be placed apart without causing con-
gestion.
i. Where the base contract document includes a floor system other than Post Tension,
and the Contractor proposes to change the design to Post tension, then the costs asso-
ciated with review of the Contractor’s design, as undertaken by the Engineer/ Consult-
ant, shall be borne by the Contractor.
C. CODES AND STANDARDS
1. ACI 318:2008 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete

2. BS EN 1992-1,-2 and -3: 2004 Design of Concrete Structures
3. Technical Report No. 43 2nd Edition :2005 Post-tensioned Concrete Floors Design
Handbook
4. BS 5896: 1980 Including Amendment No 17341:2007 – Specification for high tensile steel
wire and strand for pre-stressing concrete.
5. BS 4447: Specification for the performance of prestressing anchorages for post tensioned
construction
6. BS 4486: 1980 - Specification for hot rolled and hot rolled and processed high tensile alloy
steel bars for the prestressing of concrete (AMD 5885)
7. BS7973 Specification for Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for
spacing, supporting, and fastening tendons and tendon support bars in place.
8. BS EN 13391 : 2004 – Mechanical tests for Post Tensioning Systems
9. BS EN 445: Grout for prestressing tendons – Test methods
10. BS EN 446: Grout for prestressing tendons – Grouting procedures
11. BS EN 447: Grout for prestressing tendons – Specification for common grout quality control.
12. BS EN 934: Part 4. Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Admixtures for prestressing
tendons. Definitions, requirements, conformity, marking and labelling.
13. BS EN 15630: Steel for the reinforcing and prestressing of concrete. Test methods
a. Part 1. Reinforcing bars, wire rod and wires
b. Part 2. Welded fabric
c. Part 3. Prestressing steel
d. Local Authority Regulations
e. Any other relevant BS and ASTM standards applicable for products, workmanship and
design.
D. RELATED SECTIONS OF SPECIFICATION
1. Section 030000 Concrete – General

2. Section 031100 Concrete – Forming and Finishing
3. Section 032000 Concrete – Reinforcement
Page: 3 of 16
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. PREQUALIFICATION DOCUMENTS
1. The Main contractor shall submit pre-qualification details of the PT designer and PT installer
including the clear scope of Works of each organization. These details shall also be
submitted along with the Tender Document.
2. Submit a detailed design report for approval which shall include as a minimum all design
assumptions, proposed design method, loading details, proposed post tensioning system,
concrete grade etc., complete, before proceeding with detailed design.
3. Design drawings and Structural models necessary for approval of the PT design by Dubai
Municipality.
B. SHOP DRAWINGS
1. The Main Contractor shall prepare fully coordinated general arrangement plans first and get
it approved by the Engineer. Post tensioning layout shall be made on this base drawings
only.
2. Post-tensioning Layouts: The drawings shall include PT General Arrangement Plan,
Tendon Layout, General notes, sections and elevations, typical details etc. complete. The
subcontractor shall submit to the Engineer a completely dimensioned tendon layout locating
all tendons in horizontal plane at all points, including all details, profiles as required
fabricating and accurately placing all the work. Horizontal curvature of tendons at block outs,
anchorage shall be detailed. All openings in beams and slabs shall be shown. Shop
drawings shall be submitted to, and approved by the Engineer prior to starting any of the
post-tensioning work.
3. The PT contractor shall provide shop drawings detailing the tendon provided in one meter
steps together with all other dimensions based on grid lines for the correct placing of the
tendons. Every submission has to include general notes giving dimensions of the PT
components for live and dead end anchors, min spacing between anchors, etc.
4. The drawings shall show tendon information including chair heights at every meter and at
high and low point locations and any placement steel, if required. It shall be the
post-tensioning steel placer's responsibility to maintain alignment of the tendons before,
during and after concrete placement. Shop drawings shall clearly show location of each
tendon and method of supporting tendon.
5. Sizes, materials and stress grades must be indicated
6. Requirements for reinforcement around stressing pockets and closures must be clearly
shown
7. Shop drawings shall include calculations of friction losses to determine that design forces
are obtainable. Calculations indicating deflections are within limits specified in Movement
and Tolerances Specification are required. Also, calculations or test results of adequacy of
anchorage may be required.
8. Detailed Design Calculations shall be submitted for approval along with design drawings.
The design calculations shall include, details of basis of design adopted, design loadings
adopted including supporting calculations, soft copy of all analysis software used, soft (pdf)
copies of all calculations.
9. Shop drawings are to be reviewed and signed off by the Contractor’s design consultants
prior to submittal to the Engineer for approval.
C. METHOD STATEMENT
1. All design details and detailed Method Statement shall be submitted which shall include but
not limited to
a. Required elongation of each tendon at each jacking point. Jack clearances, gauge pres-
Page: 4 of 16
sures, initial tensioning forces.

b. Complete pre-stressing procedure to include:
1). Jacking force and jacking pressure
2). Maximum temporary jacking force and jacking pressure.
3). Certified jack calibrations and method of identification of jacks. Each jack and
pump combination to be used on the job must be calibrated. Use of non-calibrated
jacks will not be permitted.
4). Method of determining slack, if any.
5). Method of determining anchor force, or force remaining in tendons after anchor.
6). Stress strain curve of the tendons shall be submitted, preferably from production
lot from which the materials for the work were taken.
7). Method of cutting off excess tendon after anchorage.
8). Method of sealing tendons.
9). Sequence of post-tensioning.
10). Calculations of losses due to slippage or creep shrinkage.
11). Calculation of post-tensioning hardware.
12). Description of grouting method.
2. Once approved, the shop drawings and data shall not be changed nor shall construction
operations be deviated from, unless resubmitted and re-approved by the Engineer and
Authorities.
D. MATERIAL AND SAMPLE SUBMISSION
1. All PT related materials and samples shall be submitted in compliance with the submission
requirements.
2. Samples of post tensioning steel submitted for testing shall be accompanied by the vendor's
certification that the samples are representative of the material being supplied.
3. Post tensioning Steel Samples: each size of wire, strand, or bar shall be shipped to the site
or other location as directed by the construction manager, shall be assigned an individual lot
number and shall be tagged accordingly. A copy of the tensile strength, strain curve for each
lot shall be supplied to the Engineer before placing of post tensioning steel at the job site. If
adequate information concerning the suitability of the post tensioning system cannot be
supplied, the Engineer may require tests to be made of the system. The subcontractor shall
bear all costs of tests.
4. Testing Agency: All testing shall be made by an approved independent testing agency.
5. Ultimate Strength of Anchorage: Test data confirming that anchorage will develop the
minimum guaranteed ultimate strength of the strand and an elongation at rupture of not less
than 2.5% shall be supplied and submitted to the Engineer. Certified mill reports of the
strand used shall be supplied showing ultimate strength, percent of elongation at rupture,
and the modulus of elasticity.
1.3 CLOSEOUT
A. REPORTS
1. Upon completion of each section of the work the Subcontractor shall promptly submit to the
Engineer the following information
a. Concrete Pouring records (refer section 030000)
b. Cube results before stressing
c. Date of post-tensioning.
Page: 5 of 16
d. Elongation readings, including design requirements.

e. Post-tensioning force.
f. Concrete strength and durability test reports (refer section 030000).
g. Date of grouting.
B. AS BUILT DRAWINGS AND O&M MANUALS
1. Contractor shall keep a mark-up drawing and sufficient number of photographs which must
be validated by the Engineer before concreting. These mark-up drawings shall be used for
producing as-built drawings
2. As built drawings shall be submitted as soon as practical but before the time stipulated in
the Contract.
3. As built drawings shall consist of GA plans, sections, elevations and typical details, drawn to
appropriate scales agreed with the Engineer.
4. The O&M manual shall include design assumptions, design details, PT elements, PI copies,
warranty certificates, CD containing photographs taken before concreting, test results,
stressing records etc. complete. The required contents shall be agreed with the Engineer.
A. QA/QC PERSONNEL
1. The PT subcontractor’s technical representative shall be present during the performance of

the work to ensure proper installation of the PT system
2. PT designer’s technical representative shall inspect and validate the installation before the
works are offered for inspection by the Engineer.
3. As a minimum one dedicated QA/QC engineer by the Main Contractor shall be employed
only to ensure that all coordinated elements are fixed properly and PT installations are as
per approved documents.
B. QA/QC PROCEDURE
1. All QA/QC procedure shall be meet the minimum requirements stated in the Contract.
2. No drilling to fix services or finishes shall commence until the marking up of tendons have
been completed on slab soffit/ top. A clear notice shall be displayed in the area instructing
people not- to drill through concrete in the marked up areas.
C. TESTING
1. Refer section 030000 and 032000 for concrete and rebar testing requirements. In addition,
strands shall be tested as per ASTM and Eurocode standards.
D. NON CONFORMANCE WORKS
1. All the defective works shall be rectified or redone as per approved method. See section
030000 for detailed concrete rectification works.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all the materials to site bundled, tagged and marked to facilitate sorting and placing.
B. Store the strands off the ground to prevent contamination. Store the ducts properly to prevent
deformations.
C. Materials must be offered for inspection by the Engineer after the delivery.
Page: 6 of 16
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Ducts shall be kept free of water in temperatures below 2oC. The temperature of the concrete
shall be 5o C or higher from the time of grouting until 50mm square cubes of grout reach a
minimum compressive strength of 30 N/sq.mm. Grout temperature shall be ≤ 30oC and ≥ 5oC
during mixing and pumping. If necessary, the mixing water shall be cooled.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Project conditions to be as specified in the design drawings, other specification sections and
design basis report document.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Do not commence stressing until the concrete has attained the required transfer strength. Obtain
approval from the Engineer before commencing initial or incremental stressing. The sequence of
stressing shall be as shown on the drawings.
B. Stage stress according to schedules shown on the Contract Drawings.
C. The stressing sequence should be as specified on drawings unless agreed with Engineer
otherwise. Note that the central strand within each duct should be stressed first followed by the
next strand on either side.
D. Comprehensive records shall be taken by the Contractor to monitor compliance with this
Specification. Submit stressing records within one day of completion of stressing. If
discrepancies between measured and calculated elongations exceed plus or minus 7 percent,
resolve these discrepancies to satisfaction of Engineer. The following data shall be recorded:
1. Concrete mix and quality

2. Details of placing and curing including dates
3. Date of post tensioning operation
4. Name of operator
5. Type and identification numbers of equipment used
6. Calculated tendon extension at each stressing stage
7. Initial force or pressure for measurement of elongations
8. Final force or pressure and elongation on completion of tensioning
9. Elongation remaining after release of jacks
10. Tendon breakage
11. Ramming pressure, if applicable
12. As Builts’ showing exact location of cables
E. Post tensioning will be considered acceptable if gauge pressures shown on stressing record
correspond to required stressing force and calculated and measured elongations agree within 7
percent.
F. Measurement discrepancies: For any jack pressure, if the measured value of tendon elongation
differs by more than 5% from the calculated value, ascertain the cause to Engineers satisfaction
before proceeding with the stressing. Additional testing, prestressing, strengthening, or
replacement of affected elements may be required.
G. In the case of a tendon breaking or slipping after tensioning, so that the allowable tolerances are
exceeded, the tendon shall be released, replaced if deemed necessary by the Engineer and re-
stressed. Under no circumstances shall the maximum jacking force exceed the rated capacity of
Page: 7 of 16
the jacking equipment used, or 85% or the specified maximum ultimate strength of the tendon,
whichever is the lesser.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. General
1. Detailed design calculations are to be prepared by a suitably experienced, licensed and

qualified engineer, and submitted for review of the Engineer.
2. Additional requirements of local approving Authorities including additional reinforcing bars
shall be incorporated by the Contractor at no extra contractual implications.
3. The Contractor shall ensure that all designs have gone through a value engineering process
to deliver a holistic, optimized design solution.
4. Design of any normal reinforced concrete section if applicable within the PT designated area
shall be Contractor’s responsibility. In the event that the Contractor considers that additional
supports are required to be introduced to make the system work, the same shall be
designed and built at no additional cost to the Employer. The Contractor shall obtain
approval from the Engineer for such works and ensure that these are fully coordinated with
all disciplines.
5. Additional loads from Contractor’s temporary works like crane supports, loading platforms
etc. shall be included in the design considerations
6. Post tensioning and related Works shall include:
a. Installation of Post-tensioning tendon steel (strand) and chairs for same, as required for
concrete slabs and beams indicated on the structural drawings.
b. All anchorage devices for post-tensioning steel including pans, end blocks, distribution
plates and spacer bars.
c. Tendon enclosures.
d. All jacks and calibrated gauges for tensioning operations
e. Grouting of post-tensioning tendons and end blocks.
f. Submitting of records of elongation and gauge readings.
g. Post-tensioning reports and testing.
B. Design Criteria
1. Design shall incorporate, but not limited to all post-tension concrete design, and associated
reinforced concrete design, should be carried out in accordance with ACI 318 standards and
relevant authority requirements. The post-tension design shall also comply with design
intent, criteria, and requirements of the Contract Documents. The post tensioned slabs
should be designed in accordance to the following performance criteria:
a. Location: As shown in the structural drawings and/or at locations as proposed by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
b. Structural depth: Maximum depth to be as specified on the structural layout drawings
c. Span: As shown on the structural layout drawings
d. Loads: Where loading plans have been prepared by the consultant, or where loading in-
formation is shown on the structural drawings, the information provided is to be consid-
ered as guidance only and shall not be considered by the Contractor to represent all
loads that are to be allowed for in the contractors PT design. The Contractor shall be re-
quired to ascertain the full set of loading that the structure will be subject to, by referenc-
Page: 8 of 16
ing all latest drawings including but not limited to structure, architecture, landscape, inte-
rior design, facade and building services, and shall calculate all loading components, in-
cluding but not limited to partition and façade line loads, landscape including particular
landscape features, building services equipment and plinths, vehicular access including
fire tender vehicle loads. These calculated loads shall be provided to the Engineer for
review as part of the shop drawing submission.
e. Temporary construction loading if applicable, shall be considered for design, and shall
be calculated by the Contractor.
f. Deflections: To be in accordance with the requirements of either ACI 318 standards or
Eurocode2. Total long term deflection including creep and shrinkage affects should be
limited to span/ 240. Maximum incremental deflection after attachment of non-structural
elements experienced by a slab supporting brittle partitions shall be limited to span /
480. Slabs or beams shall be precambered to reduce dead load deflections if required.
g. Basic fire resistance: 120 minutes Durability: As specified in section 030000 – Concrete
General
h. Co-ordination: tendon, jack and reinforcement layout to be coordinated with cast-in in-
serts for the cladding trade contractor.
i. Preparation and supplying of placement drawings for post-tensioning materials, and
supplying and submission of samples.
j. Loads resulting from lateral analysis of the structure
k. The soil parameters for the design of raft slabs shall be obtained from a detailed ge-
otechnical investigation.
2. The Contractor shall submit drawings, design calculations, and design philosophy statement
to the Engineer for review. Following approval by the Engineer, the Contractor shall be
responsible for submitting drawings and calculations to the relevant authorities for their
approval.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. All material used on site has to be approved under the trade license of the manufacturer/ PT
contractor. The components of the used PT system have to be approved as a unit (anchor
head, wedges and anchor recess.) Material from other manufactures is not allowed to be
used on site. All material has to be tested by a local or locally approved laboratory.
B. Strand
1. Pre-stressing strands to be high tensile low relaxation strand. Characteristic minimum

breaking strength of the strand to be 184kN.
2. Other strand sizes may be used subject to the Engineer’s prior approval.
3. Modulus of elasticity to be 180,000-205,000 MPa.
C. Anchorages
1. To comply with the minimum requirements of BS4447. Anchors to be compatible with the
tendon used and to be fitted with all suitable wedges, pocket formers, bayonet fixings and
nuts, grout excluders, centering parts and covers.
2. All anchors to be placed in such a way to locate the tendons at right angles to the vertical
edges of the concrete slabs.
D. Distribution plates
1. If required, distribution plates shall consist of welded steel or cast steel bearing assemblies
that will permanently support and distribute the load from the anchoring devices as follows:
Page: 9 of 16
2. Maximum concentrated bearing stress in the concrete shall not exceed 60% of the
compressive strength of the concrete at time of pre-stressing
3. Bending stresses in the plates induced by the pull of the post tensioning steel shall not
exceed 0.75 Fy for structural steel.
E. Ducts
1. Proprietary galvanised steel ducts compatible with the tendon type and system and to be
fitted with all grout tubes and vents suitable for a grouted pre-tensioned system. Ducts shall
have grout openings at both ends and at high points.
F. Grout
1. Shrinkage compensated approved PT grout material such as FOSROC Conbextra Cable

grout or equivalent shall be used for PT duct grouting irrespective of whether the design
considers bonded or unbonded strands.
2. Shrinkage compensated grout material such as FOSROC Renderoc LAxtra/ Renderoc
SXtra or equivalent shall be used to grout the PT pans and end blocks.
3. Water shall be potable, clean and free of injurious quantities of substance known to be
harmful to OPC and pre-stressing steel such as chlorides, fluorides, sulfites and nitrates.
4. Admixtures, if used, should impart the properties of low water content, good flowability,
minimum bleed and expansion. Its formulation should contain no chemicals in quantities that
may have harmful effect on the pre-stressing steel or cement. All admixtures should be used
in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Pocket Formers: Capable of completely sealing wedge cavity; sized to provide the required
cover over the anchorage and allow access for cutting strand tail
B. Anchorage Fasteners: Uncoated steel nails, wires, and screws used to attach anchorage
devices to formwork.
C. Sheathing Repair Tape: Elastic, self-adhesive, moisture proof tape with minimum width of 50
mm, in contrasting color to tendon sheathing; nonreactive with sheathing, coating, or post
tensioning steel.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Obtain from the manufacturer and furnish a certificate of compliance with the relevant Standard
for each delivery of post tensioning steel and each delivery of anchorage components. The
Engineer is to review certificates prior to installing strands.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. It is a requirement that the design, materials and the installation shall have warranties for a
minimum period of 10 years. The warranty format shall be submitted to the engineer for
approval.
B. Submit designer’s certification stating that the installation has been done in accordance with the
design intent and the materials used comply with specification.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Mill Test Reports: Certified mill test reports for post tensioning strand used on Project indicating
that strand is low-relaxation and including the following:
Page: 10 of 16
1. Coil numbers or identification.

2. Breaking load.
3. Load at 1 percent extension.
4. Elongation at failure.
5. Modulus of elasticity.
6. Diameter and net area of strand.
B. Field quality-control test reports to be provided prior to commencing the post tension works on
site.
C. Stressing Jack Calibration: Calibration certificates for jacks and gauges to be used on Project to
be provided. Calibrate each jack-and-gauge set as a pair.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. INTENT
1. It is the intent of this section to supplement the requirements for reinforced concrete,
formwork and reinforcement as contained in sections 030000, 031100 & 032000. In all
cases relative to the post-tensioning concrete work, the more stringent provisions shall
govern.
2. Indicated Forces: If required by the Engineer, the subcontractor shall submit adequate
evidence that the forces indicated on the structural drawings are obtainable.
3. All tendons shall be supported in such a manner as to insure their remaining in position
during the concreting operations. The subcontractor shall supply in place all the necessary
reinforcement and chairs, other than the regular reinforcement called for under specification
030000 & 032000, which shall be indicated on the shop drawings.
a. Vertical tendon dimensions shall not vary more than 3mm for 150mm slab thickness and
6mm for 300mm slab thickness. Horizontal plane deviations should have a radius of
curvature of not less than 6000mm.
b. Change of direction of tendons to avoid openings should occur away from openings and
trimmer bars be provided to avoid any possible cracking at the corners in accordance
with the applicable detailing code.
c. Cover - the minimum clear cover for tendons should be no less than that required to
meet the fire resistance and durability requirements in accordance with either ACI 318
standards or Eurocode2 .Minimum cover specified in sections 032000 and Contract
Drawings shall be applicable.
4. Inserts and fastening devices required by other trades shall be permitted only in areas
where there will be no interference with the post-tensioning tendons and rods. In no case
shall embedded inserts be attached to the post-tensioning steel, and care shall be exercised
so as not to have tendons and rods displaced from their designated positions.
5. All the tendon locations shall be marked on the slab soffit or slab top with distinct paint
marks.
6. Welding and Burning - When welding or burning of steel near post-tensioning steel,
including anchorage assemblies, care shall be exercised to prevent such steel from
overheating and to prevent molten slag from contacting the tendons.
B. POST-TENSIONING WORK
1. General Requirements:
a. Post-tensioning shall be done by methods and related equipment that are in conform-
ance with generally accepted systems of post-tensioning as determined by the Engi-
neer.
Page: 11 of 16
b. Placement of Ducts - after placement of ducts, reinforcement and forming is complete

an inspection shall be made by the Contractor to locate any possible duct damage.
Ducts shall be securely fastened at close enough intervals to avoid displacement during
concreting. All holes or openings shall be repaired or closed up prior to the concrete
placement. Grout openings and vents shall be securely anchored to the duct and to ei-
ther the forms or to reinforcement steel to prevent displacement during concrete placing
operations.
c. Strands shall be straightened, if necessary, to produce equal stress in all strands or
strand groups or parallel-lay cables that are to be stressed simultaneously, or when
necessary to insure proper positioning in the enclosures. Strands shall be stress re-
lieved, clean and free from corrosion. Multiple strands in a common sheath shall be
simultaneously tensioned.
d. Broken strands and strands showing severe fabrication defects shall be removed and
replaced or the member may be rejected. Under no conditions shall a tendon be cut or
otherwise damaged during or after the placement of concrete. The cutting of concrete
will not be permitted where such cutting will in any way jeopardize the post-tensioning
steel.
2. All post-tensioning steel shall be satisfactorily protected from excessive rust or other
corrosion prior to placement, and shall be free from deleterious substances when tensioned
in enclosures to be grouted. Sufficient protection shall also be provided for exposed
post-tensioning steel at ends of members to prevent deterioration by rust or corrosion.
3. Tendons shall be clean, free from extensive rust, scale, pitting, injurious marks, undue
segregation, laminations, excessive die marks, scratches and seams. Tendons shall have
no sharp kinks. A light oxide shall not constitute cause for rejection of fabricated tendons. Oil
tempered wires shall not be used in the work.
4. Strands - all post-tensioning strands shall be bonded. The anchorage shall develop not less
than 90% of the minimum specified ultimate strength of the post-tensioning steel, tested in
an un-bonded state without exceeding the anticipated set. The anchorage shall be so
arranged that the post-tensioning force of the tendon may be verified prior to the removal of
the tensioning equipment.
C. DISTRIBUTION PLATES AND ANCHORAGES
1. All post-tensioning steel shall be secured at the ends by means of approved anchoring
devices which shall be of such nature that wire will not kink, break down, or otherwise be
damaged.
2. Slip-anchorage devices shall hold the post-tensioning steel without slip of more than 3mm at
a load equal to the applied load on the wire at post-tensioning.
3. Design, fabrication and erection shall meet the minimum requirements of BS4447.
4. Distribution plates may be omitted if the bearing area of any anchoring device is sufficiently
large so that the local concentrated bearing compressive stresses do not exceed the
stresses permitted above, or cause local failure.
D. STRESSING OPERATIONS
1. The post tensioning shall be accomplished after the concrete has attained a compressive
strength 25 N/sq.mm minimum, but a preliminary stressing may be required to control
shrinkage stresses.
a. Tensioning operations shall not begin until tests of concrete cubes, manufactured and
cured under the same conditions as the members to be post tensioned, indicate that the
concrete in the members has attained a compressive strength of not less than
25N/sq.mm. A minimum of three cubes shall be tested and at least two of these shall
have reached the specified strength.
b. After tests indicate that the concrete has reached the prescribed strength, then tendons
shall be stressed by means of hydraulic jacks equipped with calibrated pressure gauges
Page: 12 of 16
to an accuracy of within one percent of the scale range to permit the stress in the post
tensioning steel to be computed at any time. Post tensioning operations shall be con-
ducted in a safe manner and as recommended by the manufacturer of the post tension-
ing materials.
2. Hydraulic Gauges: All post tensioning equipment shall be complete with certified hydraulic
gauges supplied in place under this Contract. In order to insure that proper calibration is
maintained, care shall be exercised in the handling of all stressing equipment, and all jacks
shall be calibrated prior to, and, if required, also during the stressing operation. A certified
calibration curve shall accompany each jack. If inconsistencies between the measured
elongation and the jack gauge reading occur the jack gauge shall be immediately
recalibrated.
a. Jacking from each end of the tendons shall be required when in the opinion of the Engi-
neer there is excessive friction between the post-tensioning steel and the sides of the
enclosures. Proper allowance shall be made in any case for friction losses and one ten-
don shall be checked for friction losses at the start of post-tensioning.
b. Safe Operations - to insure the stressing operations are conducted in a safe manner no
personnel shall be allowed to stand at the end of the hydraulic rams.
3. The post tensioning steel shall be anchored at an initial or anchor force or stress that will
result in the ultimate retention of the working or effective force or stress shown on the plans.
The maximum effective stress shall not exceed 70% of the ultimate steel stress. In no case
may the steel be tensioned above 80% of the ultimate strength of the wire, strand or bars.
4. Transferred Stresses all stresses shall be transferred through approved and tested end
anchorage assemblies.
5. End bearing forces shall be uniformly distributed, or an end block properly designed and
reinforced for induced stresses shall be provided. End assemblies shall not project beyond
the concrete lines shown on the Structural Drawings.
6. Strands shall not be cut or any post tensioning anchorage be capped without the written
permission of the Engineer.
7. Loss in Stress the loss in stress in the post tensioning steel due to creep and shrinkage of
the concrete, creep of steel and sequence stressing shall be assumed to be ten percent of
the guaranteed ultimate tensile strength unless there is data to warrant a change in this
percentage.
8. Completion of Operations Upon completion of the post tensioning operations, stressing
assemblies shall be coated with an approved rust preventative material, and pockets for end
post tensioning terminals shall be filled with an approved non shrink grout. Whenever the
grouted pocket is to be left exposed to view, the grout shall be coloured to match adjoining
surfaces and shall be finished flush with such surfaces.
E. GROUTING EQUIPMENT
1. Mixers capable of continuous operation and production of a grout free of lumps and
undispersed cement. The equipment shall be capable of pumping mixed grout in a
satisfactory manner complying with the provisions of the recommended practice (20 minutes
for grouting largest tendon).
2. Accessory equipment for accurately measuring solid and liquid batches of materials.
3. Pressure gauges for placement in the grout line between pump outlet and duct inlet.
4. Pump feed shall be gravity type.
5. Standby water flushing equipment shall be supplied in place under this contract. Equipment
shall utilize a separate power source than that used to operate the grouting equipment, shall
have sufficient capacity to flush out any partially grouted enclosures if necessary due to
blockage or breakdown of equipment.
F. GROUT MIXING
Page: 13 of 16
1. Cool water (less than 20oC) shall be added to the mixer first, followed by grout material and
admixture. The quantity of water shall be as recommended by the grouting compound
manufacturer.
2. Mixing shall be of such duration as to produce a uniform thoroughly blended grout without
excessive temperature rise or loss of expansive properties of the admixture. Grout shall be
continuously mixed until it is pumped. Water shall not be added to increase grout flowability
which has been decreased by delayed use of grout.
3. Proportions of materials shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
G. GROUTING
1. PT installer specialist sub-contractor shall be responsible for grouting of PT ducts.

2. Preparation: Flushing of metal ducts shall be optional with the subcontractor.
3. Inspection of the grout
a. All grout and high point vent openings shall be open when grouting starts. Grout shall be
allowed to flow from the first vent after the inlet pipe until any residual flushing water or
entrapped air has been removed, at which time the vents shall be closed in sequence in
the same manner.
b. Grouting Pressure - If the actual grouting pressure exceeds the maximum recommend-
ed pumping, grout shall be injected at any vent which has been, or is ready to be,
capped as long as a one way flow of grout is maintained. The vent which is being used
for injection shall be fitted with a positive shut-off.
c. One-Way-Flow - when one-way-flow cannot be maintained as specified above, the grout
should be immediately flushed off the duct with water.
d. Tendon - Grout shall be pumped through the duct and continuously wasted at the outlet
pipe until no visible slugs of water or air are ejected and the efflux time of the ejected
grout shall not be less than the injected grout. To insure that the tendon remains filled
with grout, the outlet and/or inlet shall be closed. Plugs, caps or valves thus required
shall not be removed or opened until the grout has set.
4. Temperatures Considerations Ducts shall be kept free of water in temperatures below 2oC.
The temperature of the concrete shall be 5o C or higher from the time of grouting until
50mm square cubes of grout reach a minimum compressive strength of 30 N/sq.mm. Grout
temperature shall not exceed 30oC during mixing and pumping. If necessary, the mixing
water shall be cooled.
A. Testing Agency: [testing agency] a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Cooperate with testing agency to
facilitate the execution of its duties.
B. Before concrete placement, [Special inspector] [testing agency] will inspect the following for
compliance with post-tensioning installation drawings and the Contract Documents:
1. Location and number of tendons.

2. Tendon profiles and cover.
3. Installation of backup bars, hairpins, and other non-post tensioned reinforcement shown on
post-tensioning installation drawings.
4. Installation of pocket formers and anchorage devices.
5. Repair of damaged sheathing.
6. Connections between sheathing and anchorage devices.
C. [Special inspector] will record tendon elongations during stressing.
Page: 14 of 16
D. [Special inspector] [Testing agency] will immediately report deviations from the Contract
Documents to Engineer.
E. The Contractor shall give sufficient notice, and in any case not less than 48 hours, to the
Engineer of the completion of fixing of the reinforcement or tendons and shall allow a further
sufficient time and not less than 2 working hours for the carrying out of the inspection. The
inspection shall take place at a time so as to allow any defects to be rectified, prior to the pour.
A. Health and Safety: The Contractor shall take every care to ensure the safety of the workforce
and general public during tensioning of tendons (as they contain considerable energy and, if
they should be released, serious injury and damage would result). Areas behind anchorages
shall be screened off and kept clear until 24 hours after grouting. Warning signs shall be erected
and shall be clearly displayed.
B. Installation Procedures: Review methods and procedures related to installation and stressing of
post-tensioning tendons including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction schedule and availability of materials, personnel, and equipment needed to

make progress and avoid delays.
2. Storage of post-tensioning materials on-site.
3. Structural load limitations.
4. Coordination of post-tensioning installation drawings and non-post tensioned reinforcing
steel placing drawings.
5. Horizontal and vertical tolerances on tendon and non-post tensioned reinforcement
placement.
6. Marking and measuring of elongations.
7. Submittal of stressing records and requirements for tendon finishing.
8. Removal of formwork.
C. Deliver, store, and handle post-tensioning materials in accordance with the following;
1. Deliver materials to the job site properly marked to identify the location for which they are
intended.
2. Handle tendons and wires with care to prevent damage or deformity. Handle concrete and
grout constituents in accordance relevant related Specification.
3. Store in a manner to maintain identification and to prevent damage.
D. Inspect tendons and accessory items at time of their delivery to Project site, prior to off-loading.
Notify post-tensioning supplier of observed damage prior to off-loading.
E. Keep accurate and current records of materials delivered and used.
F. Immediately remove from Project site any tendons with damaged strand.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Do not expose tendons to electric ground currents, welding sparks, or temperatures that would
degrade component.
B. Protect exposed components within one workday of their exposure during installation.
C. Prevent water from entering tendons during installation and stressing.
Page: 15 of 16
D. Provide weather protection to stressing-end anchorages if strand tails are not cut within 10 days
of stressing the tendons.
E. Where there is the likelihood of an ambient air temperature greater than 30oC during the
placement of the concrete, then the reinforcement shall be adequately shaded or sprayed with
water so as to prevent the temperature of the concrete alongside the bars rising above 30oC.
F. If repair is required submit repair procedure to the Engineer for evaluation and approval.
G. Do not proceed with repairs requiring removal of concrete unless authorized in writing by
Engineer.
END OF SECTION
Page: 16 of 16
STANDARD SPECIFICATION Division 05 0000 – METALS
WSP | Parsons Brinckerhoff Section 051200 Structural Steelwork
SECTION 051200 – STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING .............................................................................. 2

PART 1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1 SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................... 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................. 4
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ................................................................................... 11
PART 2 PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................................. 13
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS............................................................................................ 13
2.2 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................. 14
2.3 FABRICATION .............................................................................................................................. 15
2.4 PAINTING ..................................................................................................................................... 17
2.5 GALVANISING ............................................................................................................................. 19
PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................. 20
3.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 20
3.2 EXAMINATION ............................................................................................................................. 20
3.3 PREPARATION ............................................................................................................................ 20
3.4 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................ 21
3.5 TOLERANCES ............................................................................................................................. 23
3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ..................................................................................................... 26
3.8 PROTECTION .............................................................................................................................. 26
Page: 1 of 27
SECTION 051200 – STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Read this work section in conjunction with other related work sections, Division 01 general
2. Read this work Section in conjunction with the Project Specific Fire and Life Safety report.
1. 053113 Steel Floor Decking

1. Materials, Design, Fabrication, Erection and Corrosion protection of the structural

steelwork framing as listed below, but is not limited to the following;
a. Beams, girders, trusses and channels
b. Columns, posts, struts and hangers
c. Base plates and bearing plates
d. Furnishing anchor bolts and wall plates
e. Lintel angles, relieving angles, and all other support fittings and materials connected to
the framework, including final adjustment
f. Shop painting and field touch-up
g. Bracing, guying and surveying of erected steel
h. All connections
i. Non-shrink grout
j. All shoring and temporary bracing
k. All reinforcing and bracing of structural steel as required for erection of the work
l. Metal deck support angles or channels
m. All other work which may reasonably be inferred as making the work of this Section
complete
1. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to establish and meet the requirements of the Local
Authority to obtain building permit for the steel structure. The steel supplier should be a
Dubai Municipality approved Steel Supplier and Structural Steel Design Consultant
registered with DM as maintained by the DM Committee of Registering and Licensing the
Practice of Engineering Consultancy Profession and Contractors.
2. The Contractor shall, if required by the governing local authority, employ a qualified licensed
Engineer, approved by the governing authority, to verify all steel design sections indicated
on the design drawings, including member sizes, studs, pre-cambers, end forces and
connection design for temporary and permanent load conditions.
3. The contractor shall provide an undertaking letter, if required by the governing local
Page: 2 of 27
authority, stating that he has checked all aspects of the steel design for submittal to the local
authority to obtain the building permit for steel structures.
the Employer.
A. General:
th
1. AISC Steel Construction Manual, 14 Edition
2. RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using High Strength Bolts, 2009
3. AISC 303-10 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, as modified herein.
4. AISC 341-10 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings
5. AISC 360-10 Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings
6. ASTM A6: Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel
Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
Standards.
7. ASTM A992M-11(2015) Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes
8. ASTM A501M-14 Standard Specification for hot formed welded and seamless Carbon steel
structural tubing
9. ASTM A529M-14 Standard Specification for high-strength carbon manganese steel of
structural quality.
10. ASTM A913M-11 Standard Specification for High Strength Low Alloy Steel shapes of
structural quality, produced by quenching and self- tempering process
11. ASTM A572M-15 Standard Specification for high strength low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium
Structural Steel
12. ASTM A435M-90 (2012) Standard Specification for straight-beam Ultrasonic Examination of
steel plates
13. ASTM A770M-03(2012)e1 Standard Specification for through thickness tension testing of
steel plates for special applications
14. ASTM A501: Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated,
Welded and Seamless.
15. ASTM A123: Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coating on iron and Steel
Products.
16. ASTM A307: Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod.
17. ASTM A325: Standard Specification for Structural Bolts.
18. ASTM A490: Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel and Heat Treated.
19. ASTM F1554-15e1 Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55 & 105ksi Yield
Strength.
20. ASTM E709: Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing.
21. ASTM E164: Standard Practice for Contact Ultrasonic Testing of Weldments.
Page: 3 of 27
22. AWS D1.1 (2010) "Structural Welding Code,” D1.1 including all supplements, addenda,
and special rulings applicable to building construction, except amendments to sections or
inspection specified herein.
23. AWS A2.4 (2007) Standard symbols for welding, brazing and non-destructive examination
24. ACI-318-14: Building code requirements for structural concrete and commentary, latest
edition. (Provides additional information for composite design and anchorage for steel to
concrete connections)
25. BS EN 10025-2: 2004 – Hot Rolled Products of Structural Steels
26. BS-EN10210: Part 1:- Hot Finished Structural Hollow Sections of Non – Alloy and Fine
Grain Structural Steels
27. BS EN ISO 2944 – Corrosion Protection of Steel Structures by Protective Paint Systems
28. BCSA 52-10: National Structural Steelwork Specification (NSSS)
29. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA), as amended to date.
rd
31. AISC Detailing for steel construction, 3 edition.
32. AISC Design Guides (No. 1 thru 25)
33. IBC 2015: Chapter 17, Structural Tests and Special Inspections
34. NFPA 5000:2015 Building Construction and Safety Code
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Submittal Procedures and submit the following
A. Tender Submittals
1. With the tender return provide details of the proposed structural steel material source,
Location of fabrication facility, location of the design staff.
2. Provide all quality management systems certifications for the fabrication and erection
company and provide details of the maximum production rate of the fabrication plant.
3. With the tender return provide details of the CVs of key personnel involved in connection
design and fabrication and erection team
4. With the tender return provide details of the proposed 3rd Party testing agency
5. With the Tender return, provide full details of the paint supplier and paint systems proposed
in order to achieve the corrosion and fire protection specified herein.
B. Post Contract Samples
1. At the request of the Engineer, samples shall be provided for each corrosion protection
system applied to short lengths of steel tube.
2. Samples of proposed primer and undercoat colour shades shall be submitted to
assist in inspection procedures.
C. Post Contract Submittals
1. Qualification Data: submit qualification of Designer, Erector, Fabricator, Design Engineer

and testing agency.
2. Verification of steel member sizes as shown on Consultant Drawings including structural
modelling in a software format as approved by the Engineer.
3. Submit for approval all Product data or manufacturer’s specifications and installation
instructions for the following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data to
Page: 4 of 27
demonstrate compliance with the specifications (including referenced standards herein):

a. Structural Steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports showing chemical
and mechanical properties.
b. High Strength Bolts (each type), including nuts and washers including mill certificates
and tension indicators, if applicable.
c. Tension control, high strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies
d. Shear studs connectors
e. Non-shrink grout
f. Anchor Bolts
g. Sliding Joint Bearing materials
h. Paint
i. Fireproofing
4. Survey Reports: Submit promptly an accurate survey of actual elevations and locations of
base plates and anchor bolts, and alignments as well as elevations of all steel as indicated
on the Design Drawings. The report shall specify that the location of the structural steel is
acceptable for plumbness, level and alignment within the specified tolerances of the
Specification.
5. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) & Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): For
welded joints prequalified and non-prequalified by AWS D1.1, submit a description of
welding procedures proposed for use on structural steel a minimum of 1 month prior to use.
Furnish joint welding procedure qualification tests as required by AWS D1.1 for non-
prequalified welded joints. Welding procedures shall be reviewed by the Engineer and an
approved copy shall be forwarded to the Structural Engineer.
6. Welding certificates of welders shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to any
welding being carried out in the shop or field.
7. Bolting procedures in the shop and field shall be submitted for approval prior to fabrication.
8. Connection test reports
a. Submit for approval all shop and field bolted and welded connection test reports, include
data on types of test carried out, specific locations and test results. The report shall con-
tain the following;
1). Name of inspectors
2). Description of the work
3). Description of the type of inspection
4). Type of weld (or bolts)
5). Condition of weather
6). Welding operators name and number
7). Type of welding equipment (or bolt size)
8). Total length of weld made or bolted locations, inspection, rejection or acceptance.
9). Remarks
b. Immediately after tests or inspections have been made, the laboratory shall furnish cop-
ies of all tests and inspection reports as follows:
1). 4 copies to the engineer
2). Permanent records of the details of all tests to be maintained by the laboratory
3). Permanent records and field books shall be available for examination by author-
ized parties upon request.
Page: 5 of 27
9. Shop Drawings:
a. Submit Shop Drawings for review 21 days prior to commencing any fabrication of struc-
tural steel.
b. Prepare Shop Drawings incorporating sufficient information for the proper fabrication of
the steelwork and connections together with Shop Drawings for erection purposes and
all Shop Drawings necessary for setting out pockets and anchorage materials, including
holding down bolts, to suit the steelwork.
c. Show framing layouts, (minimum scale of 1:50) indicating dimensions, connections with
adjoining structures, materials, finishes, welds, bolts and fasteners, anchoring and all
fabrication or erection accessories required.
1). Specify Site welds, cuts, holes and fasteners.
2). Indicate welded connections on Shop Drawings using standard AWS welding
symbols. Show all welded connections with details showing size, length, location
and type of welds.
3). Verify all dimensions and correlate with adjoining construction and materials.
4). Indicate size, type and grade of all members.
5). Include with each detail shown on the Shop Drawings a reference to the Design
Drawings and details, where applicable.
6). Prior to Shop Drawings submittal, the Contractor and Fabricator shall review the
Shop Drawings for obvious drafting and detailing errors
7). The Fabricator shall either employ or retain a structural engineer licensed in the ju-
risdiction where the project exists, further known as the "Fabricator's Engineer".
All structural steel Shop Drawings shall be completed under the direct supervision
and review of the Fabricator's Engineer.
8). The Fabricator's Engineer shall stamp, date and submit a letter simultaneously
with the first submittal of structural steel Shop Drawings stating the following: "All
structural steel Shop Drawings prepared for this Project either have been or shall
be prepared under my direct supervision and review."
9). Before being submitted to the Engineer, the Shop Drawings showing proposed
connections shall be reviewed by the Erector to confirm that the intended connec-
tion configurations are acceptable to the Erector. The Erector shall provide a letter
stating that the connections satisfy their guidelines for erection. This letter shall be
submitted to the Engineer with the first submittal set of Shop Drawings.
10). Structural steel Shop Drawings shall not be reviewed by the Engineer until letters
from the Fabricator's Engineer and Erector have been received.
11). A minimum of 2 No. copies of each Shop Drawings shall be supplied to the Engi-
neer for his review. Fabrication shall not be commenced until the Engineer has ac-
cepted.
12). In general, the Engineer shall verify the correct interpretation of his requirements
but shall not necessarily verify the dimensions or check the strength or practicabil-
ity of the details
d. Calculations
1). Submit Calculations to verify that the steel member sizes shown on the consultant
drawings are satisfactory for final permanent case and for temporary construction
case with considering the agreed construction sequence. The software and pro-
posed construction sequence should he coordinated and agreed with the Engi-
neer.
2). Submit calculations for all connections completely detailed on the Design Draw-
ings. Calculations shall be stampeded by the Fabricator's Engineer. Refer to de-
sign drawings typical details.
Page: 6 of 27
3). Calculations shall be submitted with the first Shop Drawings submittal and
shall be cross-referenced with all Shop Drawings submittals.
4). Shop Drawings shall not be reviewed without the submittal of coordinated
connection calculations.
e. Information shall be submitted as to the time and place of starting fabrication in the
shop.
f. Provide detailed method statements for the safe erection of the steelwork
g. Erection Plan: Submit a comprehensive erection plan including but not limited to se-
quencing, crane requirements, means and methods, temporary shoring and bracing and
safety procedures. The erection design and calculations shall be prepared by a Struc-
tural Engineer, licensed in the jurisdiction of the Project. The erection plan shall be
submitted solely for the purpose of confirming that the Contractor has complied with
the Specification requirements to prepare an erection plan. The erection plan shall not
be reviewed.
h. Submit the intumescent coating schedule as described within Part 2 of this Work Sec-
tion.
i. The Contractor shall provide technical data sheets for all paint materials giving the fol-
lowing information:
1). Scope of use
2). Type of product, composition with percentage of solids, mixing ratio for 2-pack ma-
terials, pot life, method of application, covering capacity, thickness of dry and wet
films, drying time, flash point, colours, packing, solvent type and final appearance,
for example, gloss or matt.
3). Health and safety precautions, storage conditions and shelf life, spray application,
nozzle characteristics, diameter pressure and spray-angle pressure, minimum and
maximum application temperatures and resistance to heat.
4). Certificate from the paint supplier the proposed system meets the performance re-
quirements specified herein and all top coats, including intumescent paint are
compatible with the total system.
j. Submit framework connection inspection logs daily to the Engineer.
k. Submit proposed location for Site storage during erection and procedures for Site clean-
up after Taking-Over.
A. As built information
1. The Contractor Shall submit final soft copy set of the approved, fabricated, General
Arrangement and fabrication drawings along with full set of all calculations indexed and
cross referenced to the plans for record purposes.
2. The Contractor shall submit a final 3D fabrication model of the structural Steelwork in a
format to be agreed with the Engineer.
A. Coordination
shall be responsible for the final design and coordination of all trades and implementation of
any effect of this coordination on the structural steel framing subject to approval by the
Engineer.
2. No openings are allowed through steel beams unless specifically approved by the engineer.
Contractor shall submit calculations and any stiffeners required along with the proposed
opening for approval.
Page: 7 of 27
3. Coordinate the installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other

construction without delaying the work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates,
instruction and directions for installation.
4. Coordinate with other trades to ensure appropriate tolerances in the connections of
structural steel members to any embedded or cast in installations are allowed for.
6. Coordinate with the Architect the proposed fire protection systems.
7. Coordinate Selection of shop primers with top coats to be applied over them. Comply with
paint and manufacturers recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are
compatible with one another and meet the corrosion and fire protection requirements.
8. Coordinate selection of surface preparation and primer coats for steel to receive spray on
cementitious fireproofing.
B. Design
1. The contractor shall be solely responsible for the following design items:
a. Producing connection design and details, and Shop Drawings of all steel to steel con-
nections, and all steel to concrete connections for the loads indicated on the drawings.
Refer to Part 2 of this specification for further requirements for connection design.
b. Producing detailed calculations to verify that the steel member sizes shown on the Con-
sultant drawings are sufficient for final and temporary cases depending on the agreed
construction sequence. The Contractor should coordinate with the Engineer in case of
an increase required in any section. Final steel sections sizes to be shown in the Con-
tractor’s shop drawings.
c. Locate shop and field splices and submit proposals for approval prior to fabrication.
d. Coordinate fully with all other trades and the Engineer and be solely responsible for sta-
bility of the temporary structure and sequence and methodology of erection of the struc-
ture.
e. All steel members and connections shall be checked by the specialist contractor for
temporary conditions and forces during erection in accordance with the contractor’s ap-
proved method of erection of the steel elements.
f. Ensure all requirements of the local governing authority are satisfied. Refer to section
1.2 – Regulatory requirements, at no cost to the client.
g. Provide details for any additional secondary steel framing required for the cladding sup-
port to that shown on the drawings, including roofs which does not form part of the clad-
ding package design.
h. Provide for any edge detail, additional stub sections, angles, closure plates etc as re-
quired by the floor or roofing system or any other trades and allow for these items in the
tender.
i. Provide steel design details and calculations for approval for steel staircases in accord-
ance with the architectural drawings.
j. Provide for approval painting system and fire protection systems, either intumescent
paint, sprayed fire resistant materials or fire protection board.
k. Provide details of specialist architectural features such as handrails, stair treads etc.
l. Review the design drawings and advise the Engineer of any pre-cambering required,
which is not indicated on the design drawings, to avoid excessive deflections under
dead loads
m. Provide design for primary and secondary support system for all MEP and associated
equipment. Also access ladders, walkways, gantries and guardrails to suit the MEP in-
stallation.
Page: 8 of 27
n. Engage a competent structural or civil engineer, licensed in the jurisdiction where the
Project exists, to review the permanent structure design, where needed, for the follow-
ing loading conditions as applicable to the Work. If the temporary loads exceed the
design loads, this shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer.
1). The support of cranes, hoisting equipment, welding machines and other construc-
tion imposed loads.
2). The stacking of materials, such as steel decking and other framing components.
1. The contractor is solely responsible for the quality control of the works. Inspection of the
works by the Engineer does not relieve the contractor of his responsibility to perform the
works in accordance with contract documents and standards referenced herein.
2. The fabricator shall be certified by AISC for Building QMS, category BU, or similar approved.
Fabricator shall be registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction and carry
appropriate licences to execute the works.
3. The steel erector shall be certified by AISC, category CSE, or similar approved. The erector
shall have completed work similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for this
project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
4. The contractor shall engage an independent licenced testing agency and inspecting agency
to perform shop & field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Provide the testing
agency with access to places where structural steelwork is being fabricated or produced to
perform tests and inspections.
5. A certificate of conformance shall be submitted to the Engineer by the steel manufacturer
certifying that the steel is new steel conforming to the specification of materials contained
herein.
6. Before commencing the Shop Drawings, prepare and submit for the Engineer's review Draft
Shop Drawings showing typical details proposed for the connections along with design
calculations. Ensure submission is clearly identified as a Draft Issue.
7. Arrange a meeting with the Engineer after these Draft Shop Drawings have been submitted,
at a time and place agreed by the Engineer, to review these documents and coordinate the
procedure for the review of Shop Drawings.
8. Connection Identification: Each person installing connections shall be assigned an
identifying symbol or mark and all shop and field connections shall be so identified so
that the Testing Laboratory Agency can refer to the person making the connection.
9. Welder Qualifications: Each welder performing work on Site shall be qualified before
commencement of welding on this Project in accordance with the American Welding
Society, AWS D1.1. Copies of each welder's qualification records shall be made available to
the Engineer and Testing Laboratory Agency for review.
10. All welds shall be inspected and tested in the shop for the following (refer to Part 3 for
requirements for testing in the field) ;
a. Visual inspection by an AWS Certified Welding Inspector (CWI) - 100% of welds
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection; as per ASTM E709
1). Manual Fillet Welds and Partial Joint Penetration (PJP) welds – random testing,
approximately 10% linear length of welds
2). Automatic Fillet welds and partial joint penetration (PJP) welds – 300mm of each
end of all welds (applies to web to flange joints in plate girders). Elsewhere, 10%
linear length of weld.
3). Tension Welds or ‘demand-critical’ as indicated on the design drawings – 100% of
all welds
c. Ultrasonic Inspection; as per ASTM E164 & AWS Section 6 and as amended below;
Page: 9 of 27
1). Manual complete joint penetration (CJP) groove welds – 100% of all welds
2). Automatic complete joint penetration (CJP) groove welds – 100%
11. Perform testing prior to welding of base material in accordance with ASTM A435 using a
grid as defined in A435 section 5.4, and for material greater than 35mm thick, perform
testing per ASTM A770. Repair (or replace) rejected material at no cost to the Employer.
Repair (or replace) repaired material if rejected after welding, at no cost to the Employer.
12. Bolting Quality Assurance; shop bolted connections will be tested and inspected according
to the RCSC Specification referenced herein.
13. Ensure that all bolts are tight and issue daily record logs to the Engineer of those bolts that
have been re-checked by the Contractor.
14. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected
according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows:
a. Perform visual inspection of studs and stud installation, they shall show a full 360 de-
gree collar.
b. Conduct standard in−place shear stud bend test on 10% of the studs, selected at ran-
dom, minimum 2 studs per erected member, in accordance with AWS D1.1 require-
ments.
c. Studs subject to the bend test shall not be straightened
d. Studs found with defective welding shall be replaced and re-tested at no cost to the Em-
ployer.
15. The specialist coating supplier shall submit a warranty and written confirmation that the
coating system proposed is suitable for the specified environmental category, life to first
maintenance and fire protection requirements and shall provide supporting technical
justification with reference to relevant design standards.
16. If material or workmanship is rejected by the Engineer or the independent testing and
inspection agency, the following procedures shall be adhered to:
a. Any and all material or workmanship which is rejected at the shop or building shall be
promptly replaced without additional cost to the Employer.
b. Any applied marks or tags identifying rejected steel from any members shall not be re-
moved while they are on the job site or shop and any steel members are not to be re-
used once they have been rejected.
c. Replacements shall be made to comply with requirements of drawings and specifica-
tions and as directed by the Architect or Engineer.
d. If arrangements for replacements are not made after seven days’ notice of rejection, the
Employer will have the option to replace rejected material and charge the cost thereof
against the balance of monies withheld.
e. Acceptance of steel work at shop will not preclude rejections, whether erected or not, if
found defective in any way.
f. Rejected steel shall be removed from the site within three working days of notice of re-
jection without additional cost to the Employer.
g. Procedures for Defective or Substandard Welds:
1). When defects are revealed, additional inspection by whatever method is deemed
necessary by the testing laboratory shall be performed to the extent necessary to
assure that the full amount of defect has been located.
2). The Engineer may require additional examination of any welds where there is rea-
son to question the weld quality.
3). Defects shall be repaired using approved welding repair procedure. Unless other-
wise accepted by the Engineer, examination of the repaired weld shall be by the
same method that was used to reveal the defect. A second repair of a defective
Page: 10 of 27
area shall not be made without the approval of the Engineer.

4). In all cases where the inspector has reason to question the quality of the material
or workmanship, no further work shall be done on the assemblies or sub-
assemblies until proper corrections have been made.
5). Material or work that is not acceptable shall be designated by words such as "re-
ject" marked directly on the material of the work.
6). Any weld which, upon examination or testing is found to be defective, shall be re-
moved to the satisfaction of the Employer's Inspection Service and the weld shall
be remade. The Contractor shall remake the welds and bear the costs of re-
inspection of such remade welds.
17. When required by the Engineer, trial assembly shall be carried out in the contractor’s works
to the extent required by the Engineer to prove the accuracy of the workmanship. When
parts, which have to fit together, are manufactured in different works or for any reason
cannot be matched before dispatch to the site, the contractor shall make adequate provision
to ensure a correct fit by providing jigs or other suitable means satisfactory to the Engineer.
A. General
1. Comply with the requirements of the general conditions and in accordance with ASTM A6
for US specified steel sections and the National Structural Steelwork Specification (NSSS).
2. Particular care shall be taken when transporting, handling or storing parts which have
been painted. Care must be exercised to avoid abrasions and other damage. If any
coating is damaged it shall be restored to comply with the relevant requirements of this
Work Section.
B. Delivery
1. Steelwork shall not be placed directly on the ground. Material shall be stocked out of mud
and dirt and proper drainage shall be provided. Structural steel must be protected from
damage or soiling by adjacent construction operations.
2. Anchor bolts, bearing plates and other items to be set by other Contractors shall be
delivered to the site in ample time for installation and with templates and/or setting
instructions.
3. Holding down bolts shall be delivered to Site with the threads protected against corrosion by
Type TP 4a Soft-film grease or with a type recommended by the manufacturer. When the
bolts have been cast-in, the bolt threads and the nut shall either be coated with grease as
specified and then wrapped with a suitable thickness of flexible PVC sheeting, securely tied
on to resist the local environment, or else wrapped in 2 No. layers of Denso tape.
4. All paint products and thinners shall be delivered to the place of application in sealed
containers, with a maximum capacity of 20L, clearly labelled, identifying the manufacturer,
formulation, colour, batch number, date of manufacture, shelf life, pot life, mixing instructions
and method of use.
C. Storage
3. Stacking: Fabricated components which are stored prior to being transported or erected
shall be stacked clear of the ground and arranged if possible so that the water cannot
accumulate. They shall be kept clean and supported in such a manner as to avoid
permanent distortion.
Page: 11 of 27
4. Visible Markings: Individual components shall be stacked and marked in such a way to
ensure that they can be identified.
6. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.
7. Steelwork shall be stored in such a way as to avoid water retention. If necessary it shall be
kept under well ventilated cover.
8. All fasteners shall be stored and protected in accordance with the current requirements of
the 'Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 bolts' approved by the
Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC) and endorsed by the American
Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) and by the Industrial Fastener Institute (IFI).
9. All paint products shall be stored in properly ventilated and temperature controlled
premises in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
10. Paint products shall not be stored for longer than the shelf life recommended by
the manufacturer. When the shelf life limit is reached the materials shall be removed from
the place of application and discarded. Store products in such a manner that the materials
stored longest shall be used first.
11. Paint products which have livered, gelled or deteriorated in any way during storage, shall
not be used. Materials which can be restored to normal consistency by stirring, shall be
accepted provided that they have not exceeded the recommended shelf life.
D. Handling
1. Lifting points shall be suitably wrapped and protected and steel slings shall not be allowed to
come into direct contact with coated steelwork.
2. Any non-standard structural elements shall be studied by the contractor to establish the
centre of gravity of the element and lifting hooks attached, if necessary to ensure safe
handling of the element during delivery and erection on site.
3. Comply with the governing local authority health and safety regulations
Page: 12 of 27
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Fire Protection
1. Refer to the Fire & life safety consultant’s report for project specific fire protection
requirements.
2. In the absence of a project specific fire life safety report or information shown on the design
drawings providing the exact requirements for fire protection the contractor shall seek
clarification from the Architect of Record.
3. Products required to have a fire performance characteristic shall be listed and approved by
the local Civil Defence (authority having jurisdiction).
B. Corrosion Protection
1. The Contractor, through his specialist supplier, is required to design the corrosion protection
system, and provide the necessary supplier warranty, for the specified corrosion protection
exposure categories are defined in BS EN ISO 12944 using a life to first maintenance period
of at least 15 years as follows;
a. Internal Steelwork within air conditioned space or embedded in concrete – C2
b. External Steelwork including any elements within the external canopies – C4
2. The Contractor designed corrosion protection system shall consist of surface preparation to
be shot blast Sa 2 ½ standard as per BS 7079 Part A1 + shop applied epoxy painted system
as per BS EN ISO 12944 as appropriate for the corrosion category specified in the contract
documents.
C. Minimum Connection Capacities
1. Unless noted otherwise on the design drawings, the connections shall be designed for a
shear force calculated using the member maximum total uniform load as specified in the
AISC Manual, LRFD method (composite beam reactions will be greater)
2. Minimum ultimate connection capacity shall not be less than 50kN, unless specifically
agreed with the Engineer.
3. Moment connections identified on the drawings shall be designed for the full moment
capacity of the section, unless noted otherwise on the drawings, as derived using chapter F
of the AISC specification 360-10.
4. Minimum bolt requirement to be A325M, M20, unless noted otherwise on the drawings with
a minimum of 2 bolts per connection.
5. Connections can be designed using bearing capacities, except in the following locations (but
shall be fully tensioned in any case)
a. All connections indicated as requiring slip critical bolts.
b. Connections for supports for running machinery, trucks and/or of other live loads which
produce impact.
c. Wind connections and/or seismic connections, (i.e. bracing members, wind girders,
WG, etc.).
d. Connections carrying elevator loads
e. Connections carrying cooling tower loads
f. Beams supporting columns or posts
g. Connections for cantilevers
h. Connections carrying window washer loads
Page: 13 of 27
i. Trusses
j. All connections indicated as requiring slip critical bolts
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Sustainability
assembly.
B. Structural steel material:
1. Hot Rolled Structural Shapes shall be BS EN 10025 grade S355JR or ASTM A992 Grade
50
®
2. High Strength Hot Rolled Structural shapes shall be HISTAR 460 as per ASTM 913-11
grade 65/70.
3. High Strength Steel plates used for built up sections shall be to S460 to BSEN10025 unless
noted otherwise on the drawings. Such steel shall be procured from Europe with minimum
steel strength of 460N/mm2. The Contractor shall submit proposed material submittals for
acceptance prior to fabrication of any of these elements. Testing is to be performed on the
plate material prior to welding in accordance with ASTM A435 using a grid defined in A435
Section 5.4. For material greater than 35mm thick, perform testing as per ASTM A770.
4. Steel Structural Tubing and Hollow Structural Section (HSS): ASTM A 501 Grade B full
body normalized or EN10210 S355 NH or EN10210 S420 NH
5. Plates and bar shall be BSEN 10025 S355JR or ASTM A529M / A572M Grade 50
6. Shear Stud Connectors – Headed stud type, in accordance with AWS D1.1 requirements.
ASTM108 grade 1010 or 1020. (Minimum Ultimate Tensile strength of 450Mpa) or
equivalent approved.
7. Anchor Rods shall be ASTM F1554 grade 36, 55 or 105, as indicated on the drawings.
8. Cold rolled steel Z and C sections to be S450GD grade as per BS EN 10326:2004 and BE
EN 10143:1993 ‘specifications for continuously hot dip zinc/metal coated structural steel
strip’. With Z275 zinc coating of 0.02mm each side.
C. Bolts
1. Bolts shall comply with requirements of the following specifications:

a. High Strength Bolts (carbon steel) ASTM A325.
b. High Strength Bolts (alloy steel) ASTM A490.
c. All ASTM A325 and A490 bolts shall be preferably cold forged and with rolled threads.
Note: Type 2 A325 bolts and Type 3 A490's are not to be used.
d. All heavy hex nuts for high strength bolts must be ASTM A194 2H or ASTM A563 DH for
use with plain (uncoated) bolts or nuts under ASTM A194 or A536 that have a minimum
proof stress not below 1200Mpa. No other nuts are acceptable, and nuts must show
both the manufacturer's mark and the relevant symbol.
D. Washers
1. Round washers shall conform to the American Standard B27, Type B. Washers in contact
with high strength bolt heads and nuts shall be hardened in accordance with ASTM
Designation A325. Beveled washers shall be furnished in accordance with the specifications
Page: 14 of 27
of the "Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints."

2. Hardened round washers in contact with high strength bolt heads and nuts must be
manufactured to ASTM F436 which requires a hardness of 38 to 45 HRC and must show
manufacturer's mark. Washers for use with short slotted or oversized holes on over 1" A490
bolts must also be 5/16" thick or thicker.
3. Washers over enlarged base plate holes shall be 12mm thick (min.) and shall fully cover
holes.
E. Electrodes and flux
1. Electrodes and flux for carbon steel shall be low hydrogen (E70) and shall conform to the
requirements of the current edition of the American Welding Society's Standard Code for
Welding in Building Construction (D1.1)
F. Bearing plates
1. Polytetra Fluorothylene (PTFE) sheets are to conform to ASTM D4894 and ASTM D4895
and shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer
2. Elastomeric Bearing Pads shall comply with ASTM D4014 and shall be submitted for
approval by the Engineer
G. Grout
®
1. BASF Masterflow 928 ASTM C 942, according to ASTM C1107 of ASTM C109, or similar
approved.
2. Grout shall be selected to achieve compressive strength twice that of the base material, in
accordance with AISC DG1 – base plate and anchor rod guide.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Fabricate and assemble in the shop to the greatest extent possible.

2. Provide in accordance with AISC specification and AISC code. Properly mark and match-
mark the material where field assembly requires. Sequence the shipments to expedite
erection and minimise the field handling of material.
3. All Steel to be used in the works shall have a test certificate reference so that its properties
are known and can be verified.
4. Traceability and material grade shall be identifiable within the manufacturing system.
5. Marking Steelwork:
a. Individual Pieces shall be capable of positive identification at all stages of fabrication.
b. Completed Components shall be marked with a durable and distinguishing erection
mark in such a way as not to damage the material. Hard stamping may be used, except
where otherwise specified.
6. Where areas of steelwork are indicated on the drawings, or fabrication information, as being
unmarked, they shall be left free of all markings and hard stamping.
7. Assemble and weld members prior to milling of surfaces
8. Fabricate members with any residual camber pointing upwards
B. Cutting and Shaping
1. Thermal cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. Plane
thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1.
2. Cutting and shaping of steel may be carried out by either sawing, shearing, plasma cutting,
Page: 15 of 27
laser cutting, flame cutting.

3. Hand- held cutting is only be used where it is impractical to use machine flame cutting.
C. Curving and Straightening
1. Curving and straightening components during fabrication shall be performed by one of the
following methods:
a. Mechanical means, taking care to minimize indentations, or change of cross-section.
b. Local application of heat; ensuring that the temperature of the metal is carefully con-
trolled, and does not exceed 6500 C.
2. After curving or straightening, welds within the area of curving or straightening shall be
visually inspected. Welds which are to subject to non-destructive tests carried out after
curving or straightening.
D. Beam Ends
1. Ends of beams shall be reinforced where cuts or blocks reduce shear or moment capacity
below the end forces indicated on the design drawings or specified herein.
E. Welded Connections
1. Provide in accordance with AWS D1.1 and employ AWS qualified welders. Make continuous
fillet welds, using not less than the minimum fillet specified by AWS D1.1, unless noted
otherwise.
2. Provide weld access holes in accordance with AISC Specification and AWS D1.1
F. High Strength Bolting
1. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
2. Provide in accordance with the RCSC Specification referenced herein.
3. Bolted connections: Bolts shall be driven accurately into the holes without damaging the
thread, and bolt heads and nuts shall rest squarely against metal. Bolt heads shall be
protected from damage during driving. Where structural members having sloping flange
faces, bolted connections shall be provided with appropriate beveled washers to afford
square seating for bolt heads or nuts.
4. All A325 and A490 bolts shall be drawn up to a bolt tension not less than that specified in
section 8.1 and 8.2 for snug tightened or pre-tensioned / slip critical joints respectively, of
the RCSC Specification referenced herein. An approved, calibrated, manual or power torque
shall be used to obtain the proper torque and tension.
5. Bolts shall be of a length that will extend not less than 6mm beyond the nuts.
6. High-strength bolted joints shall be made without the use of erection bolts. Bring members
tightly together with sufficient high-strength "fitting-up" bolts which shall be retightened as all
the bolts are finally tightened. Manual torque wrenches will not be accepted for final
tightening. Protect bolt heads from damage during driving. Provide washer under torque
element.
7. Where unfinished bolts are called for, their bolt heads and nuts shall be drawn tight against
the work with a suitable wrench not less than 375mm long. Bolt threads shall be mutilated
for unfinished bolts to prevent the nut from backing off.
8. In addition to all other requirements, a hardened washer shall be installed between all bolt
heads or nuts and material having elongated holes
G. Column Bearing Splices
1. Mill columns and bearing stiffeners to give full bearing over the cross section.
2. Plane contact surfaces of bearing plates. It is not necessary to plane bottom surfaces of
Page: 16 of 27
plates on grout bed.

H. Base Plates
1. Holes for holding down bolts shall be oversized.

2. Provide 50mm diameter grout holes in plates with a minimum dimension larger than 600mm
overall.
I. Built up Sections
1. Assemble using welding and make free of warping with axes in true alignment in
accordance with the specified tolerances.
J. Box Members
1. Where practicable, box members and penetrations into box members shall be
hermetically stampeded and in these cases the inside surfaces need not be painted.
2. Where box members are of such a size as to require inspection openings, the inside shall
be painted. Except where indicated otherwise by the Engineer, this inside surface shall be
painted with the specified prefabrication primer and the specified post-fabrication primer
only. Care shall be taken to ensure adequate ventilation during such painting, especially if
the operatives have to work inside the box.
K. Substitution of Structural Sections
1. If the specified steel shapes not available for any reason shall be fabricated from plate
material equal in strength and size to the specified rolled shape. Requests for substitutions
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
L. Inspection
1. Sufficient components shall be checked for dimensional accuracy and conformity to

drawing, to prove that the manufacturing process is working satisfactorily.
2.4 PAINTING
A. Preparation for Painting Systems
1. Offsite preparation and painting: shall be carried out under cover in properly lit, heated and
ventilated conditions. Select sequence of working from one of the following and inform the
Engineer before starting work
a. Fabricate - blast clean - prime as specified
b. Blast clean - fabricate - prime as specified (Immediately before priming remove flash
rust with a light overall sweep blast), or
c. Blast clean - prime with a weldable prefabrication primer recommended by the manufac-
turer of the specified primer - fabricate - prime as specified (Thickness of post-
fabrication priming coat may be reduced if and as recommended by manufacturer).
2. Inaccessible surfaces: The sequence of working must be such as to ensure that surfaces
inaccessible after assembly receive the full specified treatment and coating system
including, if necessary, local shop application of site coatings.
3. Surfaces shall be prepared to Quality Standard BS7079 Sa2½ Blast cleaning.
B. Suitability of Conditions
1. Do not apply coating:

a. To surfaces affected by moisture or frost
O
b. Unless the steel temperature is at least 3 C above the dew point with conditions stable
or improving
Page: 17 of 27
c. Unless relative humidity is below 85%

d. When heat is likely to cause blistering or wrinkling
2. Take all necessary precautions including restrictions on working hours, providing temporary
protection and allowing extra drying time, to ensure that coatings are not adversely affected
by climatic conditions before, during and after application.
3. Application of coatings will be taken acceptance by the Contractor of the suitability of
surfaces and conditions within any given area.
C. Application of Coatings
1. Multiple coats of the same material must be of a different tint to ensure that each coat
provides complete coverage.
2. Apply coatings to clean, dust free, suitably dry surfaces in dry atmospheric conditions and
after any previous coats have cured adequately.
3. Apply coatings evenly to give a smooth finish of uniform thickness and colour, free from
brush marks, nibs, sags, runs and other defects.
4. Keep all surfaces clean and free from dust during coating and drying. Adequately protect
completed work from damage.
D. Film Thickness
1. The contractor shall submit for approval the proposed painting system to achieve the
exposure categories and fire protection requirements as specified in this section.
2. Check the thickness of each coat during application using a wet film thickness wheel or
comb gauge in accordance with BS EN ISO 2808:2007.
3. After each coat has dried measure the total accumulated dry film thickness using a magnetic
or electromagnetic meter, checked against standard shims and recalibrated regularly
against a smooth steel reference plate, the number and position of measurements to be as
directed by the Engineer. Carry out all measurements in the presence of the Engineer
unless otherwise directed.
4. Painting inspection shall be carried out by a qualified NACE Level II painting inspector.
5. Over any square meter of coating the average accumulated dry film thickness must equal or
exceed the specified thickness, with no reading less than 75% of the specified thickness.
6. If at any stage the accumulated dry film thickness is deficient, the Engineer may require
application of additional coat(s) at no extra cost.
7. The dry film thickness of the top coat must be sufficient to give an even, solid, opaque
appearance.
E. Painting at Joints
1. Preparation for Site Welding of Shop Painted Steelwork:

a. Blast clean and mask weld areas before coating surrounding areas. If more than one
coat is applied to surrounding areas, step each coat 30 mm back from edge of preced-
ing coat. Remove masking immediately before welding.
b. Alternatively prepare and shop paint weld areas as specified, then grind off to bare steel
immediately before welding.
2. Treatment of Site Welded Joints in Painted Steelwork
a. After welding, and without delay, remove all scale and weld spatter from the weld areas
by grinding or chipping, abrade to remove all traces of rust, wash with clean water and
allow drying.
b. Prime without delay and apply further coatings to the weld areas to match the surround-
ing painted areas.
Page: 18 of 27
3. Bolted Joints (Non-Pre-tensioned / slip critical bolts)

a. Where steelwork is to be shop painted, ensure that the full shop specification is applied
to joint faces. Where steelwork is to be erected with a mill finish then site painted, pre-
pare and prime joint faces before erection and allow to dry.
b. Immediately before assembling bolted joints in externally exposed steelwork, apply a
further coat of primer and bring the surfaces together while still wet.
c. Before applying site coatings to externally exposed steelwork, stamp all crevices to bolts
and joint perimeters with compatible mastic.
4. Faying Surfaces of Pre-tensioned / slip critical bolts
a. Blast clean and mask before coating surrounding areas. The masking must adequately
protect the faying surface from deterioration and contamination. If more than one coat is
applied to surrounding areas, step each coat 30 mm back from edge of preceding coat.
Remove masking immediately before bolting, check faying surfaces are free from adhe-
sive, and clean with solvent if necessary.
5. Uncoated Fastenings: After erection, thoroughly degrease and clean and, without delay,
apply coating(s) to match surrounding shop painted areas before applying specified site
coating(s).
6. Site remedial work to Shop Painted Steelwork: Carry out all necessary remedial work as
specified. Prepare all surfaces by abrading and/or washing down as recommended by
manufacturer before applying coats.
2.5 GALVANISING
1. All cutting, welding and drilling must be completed beforehand. Provide all necessary vent
and drain holes in approved locations and stamp to approval after galvanizing.
2. Where structural steel components are required to be galvanized, complete the shop
fabrication and cleaning prior to application of the zinc coating. Solvent clean and pickle the
steel as necessary for proper pre-treatment of the surfaces. Provide hot−dip galvanizing in
accordance with requirements of ASTM A123/A123M and obtain 100 μm average coating
thickness.
3. Safeguard against steel embrittlement in conformance with ASTM A143. Handle the
materials in a manner to avoid mechanical damage and distortion. Comply with ASTM A384
and ASTM A385 to prevent warpage and to provide high quality zinc coating on assemblies.
4. Galvanized Fastenings: After erection, thoroughly degrease and clean and apply a suitable
etch primer before applying specified site coating(s).
5. Site remedial action to Galvanized Surfaces for Painting: Thoroughly degrease. If metal
coating is defective obtain instructions before proceeding. Remove any white corrosion
products with a stiff brush, wash off and allow to dry before applying specified etching wash
or primer.
Page: 19 of 27
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
recommendations.
B. Erection Equipment
1. The Contractor shall supply adequate plant, tools, service bolts, drifts, bolt tightening
devices and other equipment to ensure that the steelwork is erected in accordance with the
construction schedule.
2. All plant and other equipment shall be of adequate capacity and shall be maintained in
good working order. Reasonable spares shall be provided to ensure continuity of working.
3. The Contractor shall process, pay for and maintain all permits and certificates of on-site
inspection required for derricks, cranes and hoisting equipment. No derricks, cranes and
hoisting equipment shall be operated without a certificate of operation and a certificate of
on-site inspection.
4. Whenever the erection equipment is supported by the permanent structure, the Contractor
shall be responsible for the retention of a licensed professional structural engineer to review
the adequacy of the supporting members in relation to the loads imposed thereon. Where
the imposed load exceeds the design load, the Contractor shall be responsible for any
additional supports, bracing, connections, and similar measures required to support the
imposed load of the equipment while in use.
5. If standard manufactured elements are used for hoisting, such equipment shall have posted
thereon, charts indicating the maximum loading under varying conditions of use. If
specifically designed, the Contractor shall be responsible for the retention of a licensed
professional structural engineer to review the adequacy of the equipment for the loads to be
imposed on it.
6. In addition to the above, all hoisting equipment shall be installed, operated and maintained
in accordance with all applicable regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions
1. Examine the areas to receive the work and the conditions under which the work should be
performed. Remedy conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2. The contractor is responsible for verifying as built conditions on site shown on the design
drawings prior to fabrication and to notify the engineer of any discrepancies.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Setting Out
Page: 20 of 27
1. The contractor shall be responsible for establishing permanent bench marks, check the
elevations of concrete and the locations of anchor bolts or cast in plates which will receive
structural steel. Any discrepancies shall be reported to the engineer.
2. The contractor shall be responsible for the correct positioning and the correct levels of the
structure in relation to the datum given.
3. Prior to the casting of concrete structures the Contractor shall satisfy himself that the
structures have been correctly formed and that the holding down bolts have been accurately
set and have the full amount of play shown on the Design Drawings and shall inform the
Engineer accordingly.
4. Supply and fasten all the necessary anchorage materials, which shall be built into all
concrete elements.
B. Procedure Trials
1. If deemed necessary by the Engineer, before Work commences, carry out procedure trial
tests in the presence of the Engineer. These trials shall demonstrate the adequacy of the
methods and the equipment intended for actual application.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Provide in accordance with NSSS. Accurately fit structural members for proper elevation
and alignment of the finished structure. Make adjustments necessary in the steel frame due
to discrepancies in elevations and alignment. Adjust and align in accurate location before
permanently fastening. Design, provide and maintain temporary bracing, bridging, guy lines,
crane supports, connections, and anchors as required to ensure proper alignment and
stability during construction.
2. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in
elevations and alignment.
3. Do not use welding equipment on site without approval.
B. Temporary Conditions
1. Temporary Floors: All temporary flooring, planking and scaffolding necessary in connection
with the erection of the structural steel or support of erection machinery shall be provided.
The temporary floors or use of steel decking shall be as required by law and governing
safety regulations. The reduced load capacity of members and assembly, especially the
floor and roof beams and girders due to their unbraced condition prior to welding of steel
deck and completion of concrete slabs, is hereby noted and shall be considered.
2. Holding and Protection: In assembling and during welding, the component parts shall be
held with sufficient clamps or other adequate means to keep parts straight and in close
contact. In welding, precautions shall be taken to minimize "lock-up" stress and distortion
due to heat. In windy conditions, welding shall be done only after adequate wind protection
is furnished and set up and as specified in the AWS standards.
3. As erection of the steel progresses, the work shall be fastened securely to take care of all
dead load, wind and erection stresses. Particular care shall be exercised to ensure
straightness and tautness of bracing immediately upon raising a steel column. Splices will
be permitted only where indicated on the Contract Drawings or the reviewed shop drawings.
Poor matching of holes shall be corrected by drilling to the next larger size, and the use of
larger size bolts. Welding or re-drilling will not be permitted without approval of the Engineer.
Hammering which will injure or distort the members will not be permitted. Drift-pins may be
used only to bring together the several parts, and shall not be used in such manner as to
distort or damage the metal. All structural steel shall have suitable temporary braces and
stays to hold it in position until permanently secured.
Page: 21 of 27
4. The contractor shall provide calculation and method for all temporary works and propping
required to erect the steel members and trusses. Also, the contractor is required to
coordinate with the engineer in case of supporting temporary works on concrete structure to
verify the capacity of the concrete structure.
C. Base, Bearing and Setting Plates:
1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond reducing materials and roughen
surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.
2. Accurately set and level steel base plates, bearing plates and setting plates on steel wedges
or shims or as otherwise detailed. Furnish templates where indicated or required. Provide
shim plates or developed fills where required to obtain proper fit and alignment.
3. Column billets and other bearing plates shall be supported and aligned on steel wedges or
shims. After the supported members have been plumbed and properly positioned and the
anchor nuts tightened then entire bearing area under the plate shall be packed solidly with
grout. Wedges and shims shall be cut off flush with the edges of plates and shall be left in
place.
4. Notify the engineer when space beneath base plates is less than 10mm or greater than
50mm.
D. Grouting Under Plates:
1. Provide in accordance with the grout manufacturer’s instructions. Mix grout to proper
consistency for placement, completely fill the cavity with grout to ensure complete bearing,
o
and eliminate air pockets or voids. Trowel the grout edges to a smooth 45 bevel, where
possible and allow to cure.
E. Connections:
1. Do not weld or bolt members until affected portions of the structure are properly stiffened
and aligned. If connection areas are painted with a coating unsuitable for welding or
slip−critical bolted connections, remove the paint at least50 mm on either side of the joint
before making the connection. If modifications appear to be necessary, submit proposed
modifications to Consultant for review before proceeding.
2. Fastenings of bearing splices of compression members shall be done after the abutting
surfaces have been brought completely into contact. Bearing surfaces that will be in
permanent contact shall be cleaned before the members are assembled.
3. Splice members only where indicated.
F. Bolt Holes:
1. Do not use drift pins to enlarge unfair holes in the main material. Ream holes that must be
enlarged to admit bolts. Burning and drifting may be used to align unfair holes in secondary
bracing members only, when acceptable to the Consultant.
G. High Strength Bolting:
1. Provide in accordance with RCSC Specification. Fully pre−tension the bolts for bearing
connections as indicated and for slip−critical connections in accordance with “Turn−of−Nut
Tightening”, “Calibrated Wrench Tightening”, “Installation of Alternate Design Bolts” or
“Direct Tension Indicator Tightening” requirements, unless otherwise noted.
H. Stud Welding:
1. Provide in accordance with the stud manufacturer’s recommendations, using only personnel
and equipment authorized by the stud manufacturer. Clean the surfaces where the studs
shall be attached to make free of rust, oil, grease, paint, and other deleterious matter.
Remove mill scale by grinding or sandblasting as necessary to prevent difficulty in obtaining
Page: 22 of 27
proper welds.
I. Sliding Bearings:
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Compensate for the ambient

temperature at the time of installation. Sliding joints shall be treated with molybdenum
disulphide grease before erection.
J. Engineered Anchor Systems:
1. Provide in accordance with the anchor manufacturer’s instructions, using only the materials
and methods acceptable to the anchor manufacturer and the manufacturer’s field engineer.
K. Field Cutting:
1. Thermal cutting not permitted. Make alterations to the steel or connections only as accepted
by the Consultant.
3.5 TOLERANCES
A. Fabrication Tolerances
1. Fabrication Tolerances shall be in accordance with BCSA 52-10: National Structural

th
Steelwork Specification (NSSS) 5 Edition.
2. The contractor shall be responsible for detailing all connections and steelwork framing
members with sufficient tolerances to account for as built locations of any steel to concrete
connections such as but not limited to, base plates and anchor bolts, cast in embedded
plates etc.
3. Any critical dimensions of as built existing structural elements shall be verified in the field by
the contractor prior to fabrication.
B. Erection Tolerances
1. Erection Tolerances shall be in accordance with BCSA 52-10: National Structural Steelwork
th
Specification (NSSS) 5 Edition.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for checking the allowable tolerances of elevator divider
beams and guide beams and ensuring the as erected locations of these members are within
tolerance.
3. The dimensional deviations indicated in this Work Section mean only that the Engineer
shall not reject steelwork as being unstable if the Site dimensions of the steelwork are within
these noted deviations. These deviations may not be permitted where and when a higher
degree of accuracy is required as follows:
a. As required by the architectural features.
b. As necessary to suit the installation of the project mechanical parts and components.
c. As necessary to suit windows and cladding elements
d. As necessary to suit finishes
e. The Contractor shall satisfy himself during the Shop Drawings period that such items as
noted above can be catered for during fabrication and erection. In the event of disa-
greement over dimensional deviations, the Engineer's decision shall be final.
A. General:
Page: 23 of 27
2. The contractor shall appoint an independent testing and inspection agency, approved by the
Engineer, to carry out the testing of any field welding and high strength bolted connections
in accordance with this specification and to carry out the required visual inspections and
testing of bolted connections.
B. Connection Identification
1. Assign each bolting crew and welder an identifying symbol, and require them to mark every
connection, so that an inspector may identify the person(s) making each connection.
C. Visual Inspection of Steel Erection:
1. Perform inspection of the field erection to verify compliance with the specification and the
Contractor’s erection procedures.
D. Visual Inspection of Field Connections:
1. Perform inspection of all bolted and welded connections in the Work. Examine the surfaces,
size, quality and placement of each connection to verify installation in accordance with
Contract Documents and accepted shop drawings.
E. Testing and Inspection of fully Pre-tensioned and Slip−Critical High−Strength Bolted Field
Connections:
1. Test and inspect in accordance with RCSC Specification and as follows.

a. Observe the bolt installation demonstration testing and the calibration procedures.
b. Inspect all bolted connections to verify that the plies of the connected elements have
been brought into firm contact at the faying surfaces.
c. Monitor the bolt installation to verify that the selected installation procedure has been
used to tighten all bolts to the minimum pretensions in the RCSC Specification.
d. Test with calibrated torque wrench 25% of the bolts in connections indicated on the
Drawings.
F. Qualification for Field Welding:
1. Qualify and certify the welding operators and welding procedures in accordance with AWS
qualification procedures for the processes and welding positions that will be used. Welding
procedures shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1 requirements, using the same type of
equipment and welds to be used in the Work.
G. Testing and Inspection of field welding
1. All welds shall be inspected and tested in the field for the following (refer to Part 1 for
requirements for testing in the shop) :
a. Visual inspection by an AWS Certified Welding Inspector (CWI) - 100% of welds
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection, as per ASTM E709:
1). Manual Fillet Welds and Partial Joint Penetration (PJP) welds – random testing,
approximately 10% linear length of welds
2). Automatic Fillet welds and partial joint penetration (PJP) welds – 300mm of each
end of all welds (applies to web to flange joints in plate girders). Elsewhere 10%
linear length of weld.
3). Tension Welds (Demand-Critical) as indicated on the design drawings – 100% of
all welds
c. Ultrasonic Inspection, as per ASTM E164 & AWS Section 6, part C and as amended be-
low;
1). Manual complete joint penetration (CJP) groove welds – 100% of all welds
2). Automatic complete joint penetration (CJP) groove welds – 100%
Page: 24 of 27
H. Weld Defects
1. Cracks, overlaps, lack of penetration or incomplete fusion shall not be allowed.

I. Engineered Anchor Systems:
1. Monitor installation of anchors and conduct pull−out tests of 10% of the anchors, at random
and as indicated or requested by the Engineer.
J. Testing of Stud Welds:
1. Perform visual inspection of studs and stud installation.

2. Conduct standard in−place shear stud bend test on 10% of the studs, selected at random,
minimum 2 studs per erected member, in accordance with AWS D1.1 requirements.
K. Anchor Manufacturer’s Field Service:
1. At the start of the installation, periodically as the Work progresses, and after completion,
furnish the services of the engineered anchor manufacturer’s field engineer at the job site as
necessary to advise on every phase of the Work. As a minimum, furnish full−time
attendance during the first 2 work days, at least once every week thereafter, and furnish
technical assistance to the Installer as may be required. The field engineer shall observe the
anchoring process during installation as well as examine the completed installation before it
is covered.
L. Non-Shrink Grout
1. Prepare 50mm cubes and test for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C109
M. Charpy V-Notch Testing:
1. Testing shall be in accordance with ASTM A6, Supplement S30, where this testing is
specifically required.
N. Inspection and Quality Control of Corrosion Protection Systems
1. Coatings shall be acceptable only if measured film thicknesses are not less than minimum
and the average of measured thicknesses is not less than the nominal thickness.
2. All the work and materials for corrosion protection systems covered by this Section
shall be subject to inspection by the Engineer. Any work or materials so inspected and
found to be defective or not conforming to this Work Section shall be rectified by the
Contractor at no additional cost and in a manner agreed by the Engineer.
3. Unless other special arrangements have been agreed with the Engineer, at least 1 weeks’
notice shall be given to the Engineer prior to the start of any work covered by this Work
Section. Whilst work is in progress, access shall be given to the Engineer at all times and all
equipment necessary for the quality control and shall be made available by the Contractor to
the Engineer.
4. Blast cleaning control shall be by means of visual comparison. Further inspections may be
made using a reflectro-meter. The surface roughness shall be checked either by means of a
profile gauge or a roughness gauge. The results shall be recorded by the applicable
inspector and retained for reference.
5. Provide an adequate number of wet film thickness gauges available at the place of
application for use by inspection staff. The final check shall be by dry film measurement
using suitable test equipment.
6. During application, the Contractor shall be required to provide samples of the paint being
used for analysis by the Testing Laboratory Agency for composition and physical
characteristics. The cost of these tests shall be borne by the Contractor up to a maximum of
1 test per 1000L of paint.
Page: 25 of 27
7. The contractor shall be responsible for and protect all equipment and structures and any
other items required by the Engineer to be protected from mechanical damage from paint
dropping or overspray. Examples of items to be protected are as follows:
a. Fittings/ Fixtures
b. Machinery
c. Cables
d. Pipe-work.
e. Gratings
f. Any other structure not being painted at the particular time
8. The shades of successive coats shall differ so as to facilitate inspection and to assist
the Contractor in covering previous coats.
9. The shades of primers and undercoats shall be submitted to the Engineer for review
before commencing Work.
O. Sprayed Fire Resistant Material
1. Testing and inspections shall be in accordance with NFPA 5000 including, but not limited to,
ASTM E605, Standard Test Methods for thickness and density of sprayed fire resistive
material applied to structural members & ASTM E736 Standard Test Method for cohesion /
adhesion of sprayed fire resistive materials applied to structural members.
3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remedial Actions for Paint Applications
1. Damaged surfaces including previous coats of paint and damage caused by on Site welding
shall be made good in accordance with these clauses.
2. Where remedial work needs to be carried out, the surfaces shall be cleaned to the
same standard as the original preparation. Where the original preparation was by blast
cleaning equipment, portable blast cleaning equipment shall be used for this re-
preparation. This shall continue for a minimum of 25mm into the adjoining coated surfaces,
after which the bare metal shall be coated with the materials indicated.
3. Care shall be taken to ensure there is no abnormal thickness of coating in the areas which
have been remediated.
4. Early degradation of coatings by blistering, peeling, flaking, cracking, lack of adhesion, etc.
must be made good by complete removal, preparation and reapplication of all coats, as
instructed.
5. Inadequate dry film thickness or surface defects due to adverse weather may, depending on
the type of paint, be remedied by rubbing down and applying further coat(s), as instructed.
6. Mechanical damage to coatings must be made good by local cutting back of coatings,
preparation and reapplication of all coats to leave a neat, continuous and flat finish.
7. Where damage to coatings or subsequent surface preparation has exposed bare metal, it
must be thoroughly cleaned and primed within two hours.
B. Cleaning
1. Upon completion of the works, remove unused materials, debris containers and equipment
from the project site. Clean the work as necessary to remove dirt, loose rust and other
deleterious to application of sprayed fire-proofing, if required.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protection of Bolts in Position
Page: 26 of 27
1. Once cast in position, protect bolts against damage from any source as required by the site
conditions. Where it is necessary for vehicles to run over areas where there are projecting
bolts, the Engineer may direct the Contractor to provide temporary mass concrete, wooden
sleepers or other suitable agreed provisions to protect the bolts against damage.
END OF SECTION
Page: 27 of 27
STANDARD SPECIFICATION Div. 05 – Structural Steel
WSP | Parsons Brinckerhoff Section 053100 – Steel Floor Decking
SECTION 053100 – STEEL FLOOR DECKING .......................................................................................... 2

PART 1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1 SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................... 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................. 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................ 9
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................................. 9
2.2 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................... 9
2.3 FABRICATION .............................................................................................................................. 10
PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................. 11
3.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 11
3.2 EXAMINATION ............................................................................................................................. 11
3.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................ 11
3.4 TOLERANCES ............................................................................................................................. 13
3.7 PROTECTION .............................................................................................................................. 13
Page: 1 of 14
SECTION 053100 – STEEL FLOOR DECKING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Read this work section in conjunction with other related work sections, division 01 general
2. Read this work Section in conjunction with the Project Specific Fire and Life Safety report.
1. 051200 Structural Steel Framing

a. All Steel Framed Areas: Composite steel decking (permanent formwork) as required for
concrete construction, including all steel stud shear connectors, closures, deck support
angles at columns, reinforcing as hereinafter specified and all accessories as may be
required for a complete and properly erected installation.
b. Steel Roof decking
c. Welding: Including all welding required to properly fabricate and erect the steel decking.
d. Accessory Items:
1). Continuous edge closures, closure plates, end closures, flashing and the like, as
required to properly prepare the decking to receive the concrete, and the welding
of all such work, as required.
2). Filler plates as may be required to close gaps between decking and structural
concrete.
3). Hoisting of all materials required to be furnished and installed under this Contract.
4). Painting: All touch-up painting required for weld areas and damaged surfaces of
steel decking and accessory items shall be performed under this Contract.
5). Hanger tabs shall be furnished in place to receive suspended ceiling construction.
6). Safety Requirements: The Contractor shall be held responsible for compliance
with the safety requirements of all city, state and federal agencies having jurisdic-
tion, including the Occupational Safety and Health Administration.

authority to obtain building permit for the steel structure.
2. The contractor shall provide an undertaking letter, if required by the governing local
authority, stating that he has checked all aspects of the steel design for submittal to the local
authority to obtain the building permit for steel structures.
Page: 2 of 14
the Employer.
A. General:
1. ANSI / SDI C-2011 Standard for composite steel floor deck slabs.
th
2. AISC Steel Construction Manual, 14 Edition
3. AISC 303-10 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, as modified herein.
4. AISC 360-10 Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings, Chapter I
5. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards.
6. AWS D1.1 (2010) "Structural Welding Code," D1.1 including all supplements, addenda, and
special rulings applicable to building construction, except amendments to sections or
inspection specified herein.
7. AWS A2.4 (2007) Standard symbols for welding, brazing and non-destructive examination
8. ACI-318-14 Building code requirements for structural concrete and commentary, latest
edition.
9. BS 5950-4:1994 Structural use of steelwork in building. Code of practice for design of
composite slabs with profiled steel sheeting.
10. BS 5950-6:1995: Structural use of steelwork in building. Code of Practice for design of light
gauge profiled steel sheeting
11. BS EN 1994-1-1:2004: Eurocode 4. Design of composite steel and concrete structures.
General rules and rules for buildings
12. BS EN 1993-1-3:2006: Eurocode 3. Design of steel structures. General Rules.
Supplementary rules for cold formed members and sheeting.
13. BS EN 10143 :2006 Continuously hot-dip coated steel sheet and strip. Tolerances on
dimensions and shape
14. BS EN 10346:2015 Continuously hot-dip coated steel flat products for cold forming.
Technical delivery conditions
15. BS EN 12944 – Corrosion Protection of Steel Structures by Protective Paint Systems
16. BCSA 52-10: National Structural Steelwork Specification (NSSS)
17. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA), as amended to date.
rd
19. AISC Detailing for steel construction, 3 edition.
20. AISC Design Guides (No. 1 thru 25)
21. IBC Chapter 17, Structural Tests and Special Inspections
Page: 3 of 14
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Submittal Procedures and submit the following
A. Post Contract Submittals
1. Submit for approval all Product data or manufacturer’s specifications and installation
instructions for the following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data to
demonstrate compliance with the specifications (including referenced standards herein)
2. Mill Reports: The Contractor shall submit mill reports (certified) covering the physical
properties and other pertinent information of all steel decking required under this Contract.
3. Submit an evaluation report confirming compliance of steel deck with regulatory fire-
resistance requirements.
4. Provide copies of each welder's qualification records to the Engineer for inspection.
5. Shop Drawings:
a. Submit Shop Drawings for review 21 days prior to commencing any fabrication of struc-
tural steel.
b. Prepare Shop Drawings incorporating sufficient information for the proper installation of
the steel deck and connections.
c. Show steel deck layouts, (minimum scale of 1:50) indicating the following information:
1). Material grade
2). Finishes: Galvanizing, Paint or Cementitious Fire proofing as appropriate for pro-
ject conditions.
3). Deck layout and orientation, type and gauge, framing and supports, and unit di-
mensions and sections
4). Size and location of holes and openings through deck
5). Edge condition details and locations, including type and locations of all closures
6). Additional deck support framing where required (by Contractor)
7). Types of welds and weld patterns, including weld washer requirements.
8). Types of connection, fasteners and locations.
9). Location and patterns for button punching.
10). Layout of steel shear connector studs.
11). Shoring locations, if required
12). Include with each detail shown on the Shop Drawings a reference to the Design
Drawings and details, where applicable.
13). Prior to Shop Drawings submittal, the Contractor and Fabricator shall review the
Shop Drawings for obvious drafting and detailing errors
14). Modification of details and all deviations from the design drawings and the reasons
therefore, shall be submitted for review with the shop drawings. Each modification
or deviation shall be brought to the Engineer of Record's attention.
15). Responsibility for all errors in detailing, fabrication and fitting of the steel decking
shall be the Contractor's. Care shall be taken to maintain all architectural clear-
ances.
6. Design Computation:
a. In accordance with the Engineer of Record's design, the Contractor shall detail and be
responsible for the component parts of the steel deck, indicating location, type, size, and
Page: 4 of 14
materials, welds (length and dimensions), reinforcing, closures and the like.
b. The Fabricator's Engineer shall stamp, date and submit a letter simultaneously with the
first submittal of structural steel Shop Drawings stating the following: "All structural steel
Shop Drawings prepared for this Project either have been or shall be prepared under my
direct supervision and review."
1). Before being submitted to the Engineer, the Shop Drawings showing proposed
connections shall be reviewed by the Erector to confirm that the intended connec-
tion configurations are acceptable to the Erector. The Erector shall provide a letter
stating that the connections satisfy their guidelines for erection. This letter shall be
submitted to the Engineer with the first submittal set of Shop Drawings.
2). Structural steel Shop Drawings shall not be reviewed by the Engineer until letters
from the Fabricator's Engineer and Erector have been received.
3). A minimum of 2 No. copies of each Shop Drawings shall be supplied to the Engi-
neer for his review. Fabrication shall not be commenced until the Engineer has ac-
cepted.
4). In general, the Engineer shall verify the correct interpretation of his requirements
but shall not necessarily verify the dimensions or check the strength or practicabil-
ity of the details
c. Provide detailed method statements for the safe erection of the steel decking
d. Erection Plan: The erection plan shall be submitted solely for the purpose of confirming
that the Contractor has complied with the Specification requirements to prepare an erec-
tion plan. The erection plan shall not be reviewed.
A. As Built Information
1. The Contractor Shall submit final soft copy set of the approved, shop drawings along with
full set of all calculations indexed and cross referenced to the plans for record purposes.
A. Coordination
shall be responsible for the final coordination of all trades and implementation of any effect
of this coordination on the structural steel framing subject to approval by the Engineer.
2. Coordinate with other trades to ensure appropriate tolerances in the structural decking and
slab edges are allowed for.
4. If required, coordinate the selection of surface preparation for steel to receive spray on
cementitious fireproofing.
B. Design
1. Decking shall be furnished and installed so as to require no shoring from below.

2. Requirements at Edge Conditions
a. Make specific provisions to provide the necessary framing materials at slab and roof
edge conditions. Provide and install all gauge metal edge closures where required by
the Design Drawings and the Specification and coordinate shoring requirements at
composite slab edges.
b. Provide and install all structural steel bent plate edge closures or structural steel edge
materials and any corresponding bracing or shoring where required by the Design Draw-
ings and the Specification.
Page: 5 of 14
c. At edge closures, provide necessary modifications to the edge closure to ensure that
shear connector studs can be properly connected to the structural framing. Where pos-
sible, weld through the edge closure. Where this is not possible or where an inadequate
weld occurs, cut the edge plate at each stud and connect the stud directly to the fram-
ing.
3. Galvanized Composite Steel Deck
a. Determine the gauge of deck and minimum connections based on the span conditions,
the un-shored conditions and the superimposed loads indicated on the Design Drawings
and the associated load diagrams and notes.
4. Shear Connectors
a. Where the deck capacity is determined based on the installation of shear studs, the
shear studs required on the framing plans for composite beams or other connections to
structural framing shall not be considered to be effective in determining the deck capaci-
ty.
b. Shear studs, which are in addition to those required by the Design Drawings, shall be
provided as required by the deck manufacturer to achieve the required deck capacity,
provided these additional studs can be placed on the beam without adversely affecting
the shear value of the studs that are required by the Contract Documents.
5. Support Framing
a. Where necessary to provide support of the deck at edges of openings and at columns,
provide additional support framing in accordance with the typical details so that the deck
flutes are supported with a minimum 50mm of bearing.
b. Where no details are provided or the indicated details are not applicable, design and
provide secondary structural steel framing to support the deck. The secondary framing
shall satisfy the requirements of Section 051200 Structural Steel Framing.
6. Accessories
a. At roof and composite floor slab conditions, design and provide all accessories of types
required to complete the installation of steel decking for the system shown on the De-
sign Drawings, including edge forms, end closures, sump pans, closure strips, cover
plates and similar items.
b. Finish sheet steel items to match deck.
7. Sprayed-on Fireproofing
a. All steel decking shall be free of oil, dirt or other materials that shall impair bond of con-
crete or fireproofing.
b. Application of the sprayed-on fireproofing shall not commence until all steel surfaces
have been accepted by sprayed-on fireproofing Subcontractor and the material manu-
facturer. No additional compensation shall be granted to the Contractor, steel decking
erector or fireproofing applicator should it be determined at a later date that foreign sub-
stances that were allowed to remain on the steel surfaces will have a detrimental effect
in obtaining total adhesion in accordance with the fireproofing requirements indicated in
the Specification.
A. The contractor is solely responsible for the quality control of the works. Inspection of the works
by the Engineer does not relieve the contractor of his responsibility to perform the works in
accordance with contract documents and standards referenced herein.
B. The steel erector shall be certified by AISC, category CSE, or similar approved. The erector
shall have completed work similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for this project
and with a record of successful in-service performance.
Page: 6 of 14
C. A certificate of conformance shall be submitted to the Engineer by the steel manufacturer

certifying that the steel is new steel conforming to the specification of materials contained herein.
D. Before commencing the Shop Drawings, prepare and submit for the Engineer's review Draft
Shop Drawings showing typical details proposed for the connections along with design
calculations. Ensure submission is clearly identified as a Draft Issue.
E. Arrange a meeting with the Engineer after these Draft Shop Drawings have been submitted, at a
time and place agreed by the Engineer, to review these documents and coordinate the
procedure for the review of Shop Drawings.
F. The specialist coating supplier shall submit a warranty and written confirmation that the coating
system proposed is suitable for the specified environmental category, life to first maintenance
and fire protection requirements and shall provide supporting technical justification with
reference to relevant design standards.
G. Pre-Fireproofing Inspection: The Contractor, steel decking erector, sprayed-on fireproofing

applicator and the Testing Laboratory Agency shall conduct a visual inspection of all steel
decking prior to receiving fireproofing.The purpose of this inspection is to check for foreign
substances on the surfaces that could impair adhesion. Any cleaning that may be necessary as
a result of this inspection shall be done at no additional cost to the Employer.
A. General
1. Particular care shall be taken when transporting, handling or storing parts which have
been painted. Care must be exercised to avoid abrasions and other damage. If any
coating is damaged it shall be restored to comply with the relevant requirements of this
Work Section.
B. Delivery
1. Steel decking shall not be placed directly on the ground. Material shall be stocked out of
mud and dirt and proper drainage shall be provided. Structural steel decking must be
protected from damage or soiling by adjacent construction operations.
2. All paint products and thinners shall be delivered to the place of application in sealed
containers, with a maximum capacity of 20L, clearly labelled, identifying the manufacturer,
formulation, colour, batch number, date of manufacture, shelf life, pot life, mixing instructions
and method of use.
C. Storage
5. Steelwork shall be stored in such a way as to avoid water retention. If necessary it shall be
kept under well ventilated cover.
6. All paint products shall be stored in properly ventilated and temperature controlled
premises in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
7. Paint products shall not be stored for longer than the shelf life recommended by the
manufacturer. When the shelf life limit is reached the materials shall be removed from the
place of application and discarded. Store products in such a manner that the materials
stored longest shall be used first.
Page: 7 of 14
8. Paint products which have livered, gelled or deteriorated in any way during storage, shall
not be used. Materials which can be restored to normal consistency by stirring, shall be
accepted provided that they have not exceeded the recommended shelf life.
D. Handling
1. Comply with the governing local authority health and safety regulations
Page: 8 of 14
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Fire Protection
1. Refer to the Fire & life safety consultant’s report for project specific fire protection
requirements.
2. In the absence of a project specific fire life safety report or information shown on the design
drawings providing the exact requirements for fire protection the contractor shall seek
clarification from the Architect of Record.
B. Corrosion Protection.
1. Specified corrosion protection exposure categories are defined in BS EN 12944 using a life
to first maintenance period of 15 years.
a. Internal Steelwork within conditioned space – C2
b. External Steelwork – C4
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Sustainability
1. Ensure at least 50% of all structural steel (by weight) has a minimum of 25% post-consumer
recycled content or is reused.
assembly.
B. Structural Steel Decking:
1. Composite floor deck shall be galvanized steel conforming to EN 10326 S275 or S350, with
Fy = 280 MPa or 350Mpa minimum, and a Z275 coating of zinc prior to being formed.
Furnish decking of depth and profile as indicated on the Design Drawings.
2. Refer to design drawings for decking type, gauge, slab thickness, concrete fill and layout.
C. Shear Connector Studs
1. Welded Shear Connectors: Shall be Type B in accordance with AWS D1.1 and comply with
ASTM A108, Grade 1015 or Grade 1020, of dimensions in accordance with AISC
specifications and the Design Drawings for through deck stud welded shear connectors.
Install in such a manner as to provide complete fusion between the end of the stud and
structural steel base material.
2. Mechanical Fasteners: Provide corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, powder-actuated or
pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners, or self-drilling, self-threading screws.
3. Side-Lap Fasteners: Provide corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head, self-drilling,
carbon-steel screws, No.10 minimum diameter.
4. Welding Materials: Provide the applicable AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3 type required for
materials being welded.
5. Weld Washers: Provide as required in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
D. Accessory Items
Page: 9 of 14
1. Provide metal cover plates to close gaps at changes in deck direction, columns, walls and
openings, 1.2mm thick minimum.
2. Provide continuous sheet metal edging at openings and concrete slab edges, 1.2mm thick
minimum or as required by the Design Drawings and the Shop Drawings.
3. Provide sealed closures for ends of cells on single-unit decking, 1.2mm thick minimum.
4. For openings between decking and other construction, fabricate metal closure strips of
1.2mm thick sheet steel. Form to provide tight fitting closures at open ends of cells or flutes,
sides of decking and between decking.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Fabricate and assemble in the shop to the greatest extent possible.

2. Provide in accordance with AISC specification and AISC code. Properly mark and match-
mark the material where field assembly requires. Sequence the shipments to expedite
erection and minimise the field handling of material.
3. Fabricate composite deck units with integral embossing or raised patterns to provide
mechanical bond with concrete slabs.
4. Furnish deck panels of lengths required to span continuously over four or more supports,
three spans, unless framing does not allow for such layout.
5. Furnish deck panels with butted end conditions and interlocking side laps, unless otherwise
indicated by the Engineer.
6. Furnish deck with approved tabs or clips for hanging loads:
7. Hanger clips designed to clip over male side lap joints of floor deck units may be used
instead of hanger slots.
8. Provide manufacturer's standard hanger attachment devices.
B. Shop Welding of Steel Deck
1. When two (2) or more units are assembled by welding to form one unit, and the properties of
that unit have been calculated in accordance with the AISC Specifications, the welds
integrating the sheets into the unit shall be sufficient to develop the full horizontal shear at
the plane where the sheets are jointed. The design strength per weld shall be in accordance
with the aforementioned specifications.
2. Spot welds shall be made using resistance spot welders with electronic timers and heat
controls, with uniformly applied pressure, and incorporating slope and temper controls to
properly anneal the welds.
C. Steel Deck Openings
1. Cutting of Openings: Steel decking (permanent formwork) shall be cut by the Contractor as
required to fit pre-determined holes and structural steel framed openings which are located
and dimensioned on the structural, architectural, mechanical and electrical drawings.
2. Other than predetermined holes, all holes required by other trades shall be provided by the
trades requiring the holes (other than predetermined holes). Cutting shall be performed as
hereinafter specified.
3. Shop and field cutting of steel decking (permanent formwork) as required to provide
sufficient clearance for brackets and the work of other trades and all coping and welding of
such members shall be included under the Contract.
4. Reinforcing for Openings and Holes: The reinforcing required for all openings and holes
passing through the steel decking shall be furnished and installed under this Contract
regardless of by whom the holes have been cut.
Page: 10 of 14
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
recommendations.
B. Construction Loading
1. Assume complete responsibility for the loading of composite floor deck due to construction
loads.
2. The Contractor shall verify when it is acceptable to place loads on the composite floor deck
with the deck supplier who shall substantiate that the slab deck shall not be damaged or
shall have a reduced capacity as a result of the proposed construction loads.
3. Assume responsibility to repair any damage that occurs to the deck due to construction
loads caused by Contractor's activities and by the activities of Subcontractors.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Surface Conditions:
1. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Work Section shall be
performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do
not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install decking in accordance with accepted Shop Drawings and the manufacturer's
recommendations. Where steel deck shall be welded to steel framing with puddle welds
or shear studs, the steel framing shall be free of dirt and debris prior to laying the steel
deck. Any water in the deck's valley shall be released so it does not become entrapped
between the deck and the beam. The deck shall be installed so that the bottom rib is in
continuous contact with the steel framing.
2. Accurately align and adjust steel panel units in place before permanently fastening.
Provide butt end spliced, do not overlap ends of deck. Inaccuracies in alignment or level
shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer and corrected by the Contractor before
steel panels are finally placed.
3. Provide proper bearing on support framing of 50mm minimum to steel and 100mm minimum
to CMU or concrete. Where shear connector studs are used, place deck so that the stud can
be placed on top of the framing. If the stud falls within the top of the flute, cut a slot
through the deck and provide closure so that fresh concrete shall not leak.
4. Reinforce openings in accordance with structural framing details indicated on the Shop
Drawings and the Design Drawings and manufacturer's recommended details.
5. Install strip closures at slab edges of the thickness of slab, as required to contain poured
Page: 11 of 14
concrete. Ensure closures are of sufficient strength to remain in place without distortion.
6. Install closure strips and angle flashings as required to close openings between deck
and walls, columns and openings and gaps between deck, to prevent concrete leakage.
7. Connections
a. After deck has been aligned, provide permanent connections to the support framing with
welds, shear connector studs, screw fasteners or powder driven fasteners as required
by the manufacturer or as indicated on the Shop Drawings and the Design Drawings.
b. All closures, edge forms, plates and similar items shall be securely connected to the
support framing in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as indi-
cated on the Shop Drawings and the Design Drawings.
8. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds and methods used in correcting work. Use welding
washers where recommended by the deck manufacturer.
9. Furnish shoring as required to maintain position of structures and prevent deflection beyond
allowable limits. Ensure construction loads do not exceed deck carrying capacity in
accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.
B. Shear Connectors
1. General:
a. Weld shear connectors to supports through decking units in accordance with the manu-
facturer's instructions.
b. Shear studs may be used in lieu of 20mm puddle welds.
c. The studs shall be installed only by certified operators approved by the manufacturer
and who are thoroughly familiar with the installation equipment.
d. A copy of the operating instructions for the equipment shall be at the Site at all times.
e. Interchanging of studs and welding equipment of different manufacturers shall not be
permitted.
2. Installation, inspection and qualification of weld base metal shall conform to the
requirements of AWS D1.1.
3. The first 2 No. studs, at the start of each production period, meaning the interval
between start-up and shut-down of equipment, and at the start of each new welding
procedure, shall be tested by bending to an angle of 30° by striking the stud with a hammer,
this is in lieu of the first sentence in Paragraph a of the AWS D1.1. If failure occurs in the
weld, the procedure shall be corrected and the next 2 studs shall be welded and tested prior
to welding of any more studs.
4. If after welding, visual inspection reveals that a sound weld or a full 360° flash has not
been obtained for a particular stud, the stud shall be replaced. At the Contractor's option,
the weld may be repaired by AWS D1.1.
5. Studs that show no signs of failure shall be accepted as shear connectors provided they
meet the dimensional limitations of the Shop Drawings and the Design Drawings, provided
no portion is less than 25mm from a proposed concrete surface, and provided any bends or
out-of-plumbness does not exceed 15°. In addition, all studs shall extend not less than
40mm above the top of the decking. If thru-deck stud welding is not practical, provide
pre-punched holes in deck.
6. The studs shall have complete fusion to the steel beams underlying the decking. Where
repairs are made by fillet welding, such welding shall be between stud and beam, with
removal of portions of the decking as required.
7. Ferrules shall be removed after completion.
8. Do not weld shear connectors through two layers, meaning lapped ends, of decking units.
Page: 12 of 14
9. Weld only on clean, dry deck surfaces.

10. Space and align shear connectors as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by the
manufacturer.
11. On steel beam supporting steel deck with concrete or cast-in-place concrete, shear studs
shall be placed at a maximum spacing of at 600mm on center, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Hanging Loads
1. Do not hang concentrated loads exceeding 25kg from the steel roof deck.
2. Loads shall be located no closer than 1500mm from any adjacent hanging load.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances
1. Unless otherwise indicated, edge materials shall be field installed to the minimum tolerances
of this Section or as required for the installation of the cladding system, whichever is more
stringent.
a. Edge Location: ±13mm from established building working lines.
2. Edge Height: ±3mm from established slab thickness.
A. General:
B. Visual Inspection of Steel Erection:
1. Perform inspection of the field erection to verify compliance with the specification and the
Contractor’s erection procedures.
C. Testing of Stud Welds:
1. Perform visual inspection of studs and stud installation.

2. Conduct standard in−place shear stud bend test on 10% of the studs, selected at random,
minimum 2 studs per erected member, in accordance with AWS D1.1 requirements.
A. Cleaning
1. Prior to placement of concrete or other finish materials, the deck shall be cleaned to be
free of debris and water.
B. Adjusting
1. Galvanizing Repairs: Repair galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized
repair paint according to ASTM A780 and the manufacturer's written instructions at cut
edges or locations where coating has been damaged.
3.7 PROTECTION
1. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without
damage or deterioration at time of Taking-Over.
2. Provide protection against concrete splatter or spillage for all materials that would be
Page: 13 of 14
adversely affected by this occurrence.
END OF SECTION
Page: 14 of 14
STANDARD SPECIFICATION Div. 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection
WSP | Parsons Brinckerhoff Section 071300 Thermal and Moisture Protection Sheets
SECTION 071300THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SHEET ...........................................................................2

PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................................2
1.1 SUMMARY .....................................................................................................................................................2
1.2 SUBMITTALS .................................................................................................................................................3
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................ 5
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE.................................................................................................................................5
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ......................................................................................................6
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................................... 6
PART 2 PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................................................7
2.1 MEMBRANE MATERIALS ............................................................................................................................. 7
2.2 ACCESSORIES .............................................................................................................................................8
PART 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................17
3.1 EXAMINATION ............................................................................................................................................ 17
3.2 PREPARATION ........................................................................................................................................... 17
3.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................................ 18
3.4 PROTECTION .............................................................................................................................................. 18
Page: 1 of 18
SECTION 071300THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SHEET
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. General: This section outlines SIKA waterproofing systems products description and specifications required
for the project. Read this Section in conjunction with other related Sections, the Contract Drawings and the
Contract Conditions.
B. Section Includes
1. Sheet membrane waterproofing for below grade applications.
2. Protection boards.
3. All necessary accessories.
C. Related Sections and Documentation
1. Section 03 1100 Concrete Formwork.
2. Section 03 2000 Concrete Reinforcement.
3. Section 03 0000 Concrete General.
4. Section 03 3500 Concrete Finishes and Repair of Surface Defects.
5. Section 05 1200 Structural Steel.
6. Section 31 2300 Excavation and Fill.
7. Section 31 2319 Dewatering.
8. Section 31 3116 Termite Control.
9. Section 31 6319 Bored Piles.
1.2 Scope:
A. The contractor shall be responsible for the design, supply, installation and testing of the waterproofing
membrane system in its entirety to all buried concrete surfaces in contact with the soil, ground floor
podium level slabs or temporary retaining structures including but not limited to, basement slabs and walls
raft slabs, slabs on grade, tanks, manholes, swimming pools, footings, foundations to fences, posts and
walls. The requirements of the waterproofing system indicated in this section are the minimum
requirements and the specialist manufacturer/ supplier shall be responsible for submitting a fully detailed
specification and drawings.
B. Supply and installation of necessary components as required by the approved system including all
movement and expansion joints and at all construction joints including delayed pour strips as applicable.
Coordination with the design team for the location of any injection hose points inside the building.
C. The details shown on the design drawings are intended as indicative and not intended as inclusive of all
required waterproofing interfaces. The Contractor is required to liaise with the waterproofing contractor
and waterproofing manufacturer at tender stage and include in his tender for all necessary waterproofing
items as required to ensure watertight construction. The contractor shall also review all MEP drawings for
service penetrators and include for all interfaces at tender stage
D. Refer to architectural drawings and specifications for details of all waterproofing to other areas above
ground roof slabs
Page: 2 of 18
1.3 WATERPROOFING SYSTEM, SUPPLIER AND APPLICATOR – PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS.
A. WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
1. Waterproofing system shall have a service life of a minimum of 50 years
2. The waterproofing systems shall be fully compatible with any building insulation specified, root barriers,
drainage layers etc. which constitute the external building envelope
3. All components of the waterproofing system shall be supplied by a single source/ manufacturer.
4. All the below ground and or buried horizontal and vertical construction joints shall be provided with re-
injectable injection hoses in addition to water stops.
5. The contractor shall submit proposals for the making good of waterproofing between the demolished
portion of the buildings and new construction, where applicable.
6. The contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all interfaces with adjacent developments in
preparing waterproofing shop drawings.
B. WATERPROOFING SUPPLIER
1. The waterproofing system shall be a proprietary product supplied by Sika.
2. The contractor, with all necessary technical support from Sika, shall develop and prepare all necessary
waterproofing interfaces for approval. A design document with all relevant design drawings (to full shop
drawing details), specifications and QA/QC requirements shall be prepared by the system
manufacturer/ supplier and submitted by the Contractor for Engineer’s approval. It will be a
requirement of this contract that this submission shall be formally approved by Sika’s technical
department prior to construction.
C. WATERPROOFING SYSTEM APPLICATOR
1. Waterproofing shall be applied by an applicator approved in writing by the waterproofing system

manufacturer.
2. The applicator and his site agents shall have a minimum of ten years of proven experience in this
type of work and climatic condition. The applicator shall have necessary equipment and skilled labour
to carry out the work satisfactorily.
3. The applicator shall produce documentary evidence to prove that at least five of his completed works
with the proposed waterproofing system and which are operational have no complaints of any leakage.
Engineer reserves the right to visit such sites and make enquiries with concerned Employer/ Engineer.
4. The applicator shall be capable of producing shop drawings of highest quality showing all relevant
details and which are fully coordinated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall include the following:
A. TENDER STAGE SUBMISSION
At tender stage, the contractor shall be required to provide outline description and outline details of
proposed waterproofing system, including product details, warranty conditions, proposed system and
applicator details etc. complete. Acceptance of the tender however shall not imply that the proposed
system, supplier and applicator are approved.
B. Post Contract Submittals
Page: 3 of 18
1. Shop Drawings.
a. Show layout of sheets including laps.
b. Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interface with other materials.
c. Shop Drawings shall conform to the manufacturer's approved details.
d. Show project specific details at expansion joints, construction joints, power strips, cast in service
pipes, box out openings, foundation/wall interfaces.
e. Pile head detail
f. Services penetration
g. Protection system and screed.
2. Product Data: Provide data for membrane and primer.

Provide manufacturer’s printed material specifications and membrane installation instructions,
including methods and materials used for terminations, penetrations, flashing, protection,
compatibility and bonding
3. Supplementary Product Literature: Include a statement from the manufacturer for the design life of the
system.
4. List of tests included.
5. Certified test data.
6. Outline technical specifications reflecting proposed materials and systems.
7. A list of proposed suppliers and Subcontractors intended to be used.
8. Preliminary Method Statement.
9. Preliminary Quality Plan.
10. Summary of deviations from the Specification.
11. Post Contract Samples

a. Membrane: Provide 300 mm x 300 mm sample for each type specified.
b. Protection Board - Provide 3, 100 x 100 samples.
c. Waterstops - provide 3 x 300mm length of PVC waterstops.
d. Injection hoses
e. Termination boxes
f. Injection flanges
1.5 METHOD STATEMENT
A. Submit a fully detailed method statement which shall include in addition to standard requirements stated
elsewhere in the Contract document, the following
1. Sequence of works in a logical order which will ensure that all the membranes are protected
immediately after they are laid before next activity is started
2. Testing regime, inspection and test plan. All the joints must be tested.
3. Quality risks before and after laying the membrane, risk response and risk prevention plans.
4. Maintaining a register of daily checks for the newly laid membrane from membrane laying stage until it
is covered permanently with concrete/ backfill.
Page: 4 of 18
5. Procedure for tests at completion, switching off dewatering where applicable.
6. Procedure for maintaining as built mark-ups for all the works before they are covered.
B. The Main Contractor shall be responsible for preparing the Method Statement with input from
waterproofing applicator/ sub-contractor. The Method Statement shall be validated by the waterproofing
system manufacturer and applicator before submission
A. General: Submittals shall include the following.
1. Warranties
a. Contractor shall correct defective Work within a 10 year period after Date of Substantial
Completion; remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at no extra cost to Employer.
b. Provide 10 year manufacturer warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water,
except where such failures are the result of structural failures of building. Normal cracking of
concrete due to temperature change or shrinkage is not considered a structural failure.
c. Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Employer's name and
registered with manufacturer.
2. Operations and Maintenance (O+M) Manuals: Include component list with manufacturer's reference
numbers, descriptions of materials and procedures for repairing and cleaning of finishes and cleaning
frequency.
a. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring
special attention, and acceptable installation temperatures.
3. Certificate
a. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
b. Submit manufacturer's approval of applicator.
A. Membrane Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in waterproofing sheet membranes with five
years’ experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five
years’ experience.
C. Standards and other Codes of Practice: In addition to the requirements indicated on the Contract Drawings
or indicated in the Specification, the Work shall be in accordance with provisions of the following standards
and codes. The current editions of the publications listed below form a part of this Section.
1. British and European Standards

a. BS 8000-4 Workmanship on building sites.
b. BS 8102 Code of Practice for protection of below ground structures against water from the ground.
c. BS EN 13491 Geosynthetic Barriers – Characteristics required for use as a fluid barrier in the
construction of tunnels and underground structures.
d. BS EN 13967 Flexible sheets for waterproofing Plastic and rubber damp proof sheets including
plastic and rubber basement tanking sheets.
D. Mock-up
Page: 5 of 18
1. Construct mockup 10 sq. m. of horizontal and vertical waterproofed panel to represent finished work
including internal and external corners.
2. Water stops: Provide 3x300 mm length samples of external PVC water-stops and related accessories
3. Internal water stops: Provide 3x300 mm length samples of internal PVC water-stops and related
accessories
4. Movement Joint: Provide 3x300 mm length samples of movement joint water-stops and other
accessories.
5. Locate where directed.
6. Mockup may remain as part of the Work.
E. Preconstruction Testing/ Reports
1. Submit reports of independent tests demonstrating that the products and systems are in accordance
with the specified performance requirements.
2. Where test results for a material or product are not available, undertake testing to show compliance
with the Specification at an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer.
3. The provision of testing data or the carrying-out of tests does not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibilities regarding the performance requirements, durability or service life requirements.
F. All materials supplied and installed shall be new and the best quality obtained for the intended purpose and
shall, where applicable, conform to the standards.
G. All materials required for installation under these Specification's shall be subject to the acceptance of the
Engineer. Where no specific indication as to the type or quality of material or equipment is indicated, a first
class standard article to the Engineer's acceptance shall be furnished.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to Site with particular reference to Dubai, UAE.
B. Transportation, handling and storage of all components and any other products shall be in accordance to
manufacturer recommendations.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Project Climatic Conditions
1. The climate in UAE in the summer months is hot and humid and a humidity of 100% at 47°C has been
recorded.
2. 3 basements deep basement with water head in excess of 7m
3. Climate
a. Violent Sand dust storms of several hours duration occur and even on comparatively still days,
fine dust is carried in suspension in the air.
B. Civil Work Coordination
1. Take into account all of the Civil/ Mechanical Work performed by all other Subcontractors associated
with installation of electrical, mechanical, plumbing and other facilities.
Page: 6 of 18
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MEMBRANE MATERIALS
The following SIKA waterproofing systems shall be used:
A. Basement Raft and Basement Structure waterproofing: PVC-P Waterproofing Lining System with
Compartments and Control Injection System - PVC-P Waterproofing Lining system with Compartments
area of maximum 150m2 and Control Injection system: Sikaplan® WP 1100-20HL system comprised of the
following layers:
1. Sikaplan® WP 1100-20HL (PVC-P Waterproofing Membrane Sheet): A homogeneous sheet

waterproofing membrane with 0.6 mm thick signal layer and 2 mm total thickness, based on
polyvinylchloride (PVC-P).
2. Bontec SNW 46 (Geotextile Protection layer): Needle punched non-woven polypropylene
geotextile with CE marking and of minimum 350 gr/m2 located behind the membrane.
3. Sika® Waterbar (PVC water stop for detailing): A PVC water stop 250-280 mm wide for pile
head detail, construction joints and compartments welded to the membrane.
4. Sikaplan® WP Control Socket (Injection Flanges): A PVC control and injection flanges for future
injection of the compartment in case of leakage.
5. SikaFuko® VT 1 (Injectable Hose): An injectable hose with unique integral ‘valves’ for sealing
and possibly resealing construction joints in watertight structures against water and salt water
ingress.
6. Sika® Injection-306 (Elastic Polyacrylic Injection Resin): Very low viscosity, elastic, polyacrylic
injection resin with a versatile and adjustable reaction time used for permanent watertight
sealing.
7. Sikacrete®-114 AE (Free Flowing Micro-concrete for pile head): One component, free-flowing,
high strength, cement based micro-concrete with a maximum aggregate size of 10mm for pile
head re-profiling and anchoring of PVC water stops.
8. Sikadur®-42 PC (Epoxy Grout for pile head): Three-Part, solvent-free, high strength, castable
and moisture tolerant epoxy grouting system specially designed for pile cap applications.
B. All levels below level of Tower Raft (Basement Lift Wells): Waterproofing Double Layer Compartmentalized
System - PVC-P Waterproofing Double layer system with Compartments and Control Injection system:
Sikaplan® WP 1100-20HL system comprised of the following layers:
1. Sikaplan® WP 1100-20HL (PVC-P Waterproofing Membrane Sheet): A homogeneous sheet

waterproofing membrane with 0.6 mm thick signal layer and 2 mm total thickness, based on
polyvinylchloride (PVC-P) and applied on two layers as a Vacuum system.
2. Bontec SNW 46 (Geotextile Protection layer): Needle punched non-woven Polypropylene
geotextile with CE marking and of minimum 350 gr/m2 located behind the membrane.
3. K ROOF C 10 EP S (Geomat layer): Three dimensional mesh of polypropylene synthetic
monofilaments of minimum 350 gr/m2.
4. Sika® Waterbar (PVC water stop for detailing): A PVC water stop 200-280 mm wide for pile
head detail, construction joints and compartments welded to the membrane.
5. Sikaplan® WP Control Socket (Injection Flanges): A PVC control and injection flanges for future
injection of the compartment in case of leakage.
6. SikaFuko® VT 1 (Injectable Hose): An injectable hose with unique integral ‘valves’ for sealing
and possibly resealing construction joints in watertight structures against water and salt water
ingress.
7. Sika® Injection-306 (Elastic Polyacrylic Injection Resin): Very low viscosity, elastic, polyacrylic
injection resin with a versatile and adjustable reaction time used for permanent watertight
sealing.
8. Sikacrete®-114 AE (Free Flowing Micro-concrete for pile head): One component, free-flowing,
high strength, cement based micro-concrete with a maximum aggregate size of 10mm for pile
head re-profiling and anchoring of PVC water stops.
9. Sikadur®-42 PC (Epoxy Grout for pile head): Three-Part, solvent-free, high strength, castable
and moisture tolerant epoxy grouting system specially designed for pile cap applications.
Page: 7 of 18
2.2 ACCESSORIES:
The following SIKA accessories shall be used:
A. PVC Water bars
B. Injection flanges
C. Fixing plates
D. Control socket
E. Injection hoses
F. Felt Membrane – geotextile underlay
G. Injection resin
H. Chloride resistant swellable products
I. Pile head waterproofing
2.3 PRODUCTS PHYSICAL PROPERTIES:
A. Single layer system used for Basement Raft and Basement Structure waterproofing (Excluding Lift Wells
under Tower Raft, refer to Clause 2.3 B):
1. PVC-P Waterproofing Membrane Sheet and geotextile protection layer: Physical properties complying
with the following:
SikaPlan® WP 1100-20HL (PVC-P Waterproofing Membrane Sheet): Waterproofing membrane with

minimum thickness of 2.00mm that shall be loosely laid with mechanical fixation, with the following
properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Thickness EN 1849 - 2 2.0 (-5/+10%) mm
Mass per unit area EN 1849 - 2 2.60 (-5 /+10%) kg/m2
Water Permeability EN 14150: 2001 < 10-7 m3 x m-2 x d-1
(liquid tightness)
Tensile Strength ISO R 527 – 1/3/5 Machine: 17.0 (±2.0) N/mm2
Cross: 16.0 (±2.0) N/mm2
Tear Strength ISO 34 Method B; Machine: ≥ 42 kN/m
V=50 mm/min Cross: ≥ 42 kN/m
Elongation ISO R 527 – 1/3/5 Machine: ≥ 300%
Cross: ≥ 280%
Burst Strength EN 14151 D=1,0 m ≥ 50%
Static Puncture EN ISO 12236 2.35 (± 0.25) kN
Low Temperature EN 495-5 ≤ -20°C
Behaviour
Thermal Expansion ASTM D 696-91 190 x 10-6 (±50x10-6) 1/K
2
Weathering EN 12224, 350 MJ/m Remaining tensile strength and
ISO 527-3/5/100 elongation: ≥ 75 %
Micro Organism EN 12225; ISO 527-3/5 Change of tensile strength and
Page: 8 of 18
elongation: ≤ 15%
Oxidation EN 14575; ISO 527-3/5 Change of tensile strength and
elongation: ≤ 25%
Chemical Resistance EN 14414: 2004-08 Change in elongation ≤ 10 %
(acid conditions) ISO 527-3/5
(alkaline conditions) ISO 527-3/5
(artificial disposal ISO 527-3/5
water)
Resistance to Root EN 14416:2002 Pass
Penetration
Reaction to Fire EN ISO 11925-2 Class E
Behaviour under EN 1928 (DIN 16726-5.11) 5 bar / 72hr (10 bar / 24hr)
Hydrostatic Pressure No leakage
Thermal Ageing EN 1296 (SIA V280-8) (70 d / 70°C)
Change of weight ≤ 2.0%
Change of tensile strength ≤ 20%
Change of elongation ≤ 20%
Elastic Modulus E1-2 ISO 527-1/3 Machine and cross direction:
≤ 20 N/mm2
Heat Distortion EN 1107-2 (SIA V280-4; DIN 6hr / 80°C
Dimensional Stability 16726-5.13) Machine and cross direction: ≤ 2.0%
Behavior after heat exposure:
No blisters
Impact Resistance EN 1107-2 (SIA V280-4; DIN (500 g)
16726-5.12) No leakage at 750 mm
Long Term SIA V280-14 No leakage at 7 N/mm2 , (50hr)
Compression Strength
Behaviour after EN 1296 (SIA V280-13) 8mt / 50°C
Storage in Warm Change of weight ≤ 4.0%
Water Change of tensile strength ≤ 20%
Behaviour after EN 1847 (SIA V280-18; DIN (28 d / 23°C), H2SO3 (5%); Ca(OH)2
Storage in Aqueous 16726-5.18) (sat.); NaCI (10%)
Solutions Change of tensile strength ≤ 15%
Behavior of Welding Tensile shearing test:
Break outside the welding seam
EN 12317-2 Short time welding factor: fz = ≥ 0.6
EN 12316-2 Peeling resistance: ≥ 6 N/mm
2. Bontec SNW 46 geotextile 350g/sq..m. (Geotextile Protection layer): A cushion layer beneath the
waterproofing membrane of minimum 350 gr/m2 shall be installed on top of the blinding concrete which
should be free from all projections and loose materials. The geotextile membrane should be loose laid
and overlapped minimum 100mm, with the following properties:

Composition 100% polypropylene non-woven geotextile
Page: 9 of 18
Mass EN ISO 9864 350 g/m2

Tensile Strength EN ISO 10319 Machine: 25.9 kN/m (±3.4kN/m)
Cross: 27.9 kN/m (±3.6kN/m)
Elongation EN ISO 10319 Machine: 55 % (± 12.7 %)
Cross: 66 % (± 13.8 %)
Static Puncture Resistance EN ISO 12236 4.60 kN (± 0.96kN)
Dynamic Perforation Resistance EN ISO 13433 10 mm (±2.5 mm)
Protection Efficiency EN ISO 14574 442.0 N (± 88.4 N)
Thickness under 2 kPa EN ISO 9863-1 2.90 mm (±0.58 mm)
3. PVC-P Water stop and the injection and Control Flanges and hoses for back-up injection system:
Physical properties complying with the following:
Sika® Waterbar (PVC water stop for detailing): A PVC water stop 250-280mm wide for construction joints and
compartments welded to the membrane, with the following properties:
Tensile Strength DIN 53455 ≥ 10 N/mm2
Elongation at Break DIN 53455 ≥ 200 %
Tear Strength DIN 53507 A) ≥ 12 N/mm2
Shore D Hardness DIN 53505 ~ 70 - 85
Chemical Resistance Water, seawater and sewage
Pass
(Permanent Exposure) at temperatures of 23°C
Chemical Resistance Dilute inorganic alkalis, mineral
Pass
(Temporary Exposure) acids and mineral oils
Alkali Resistance US Corps of Engineers: CRD-
Pass
C 572-65
Sikaplan® WP Control Socket (Injection Flanges): A PVC control and injection flanges for future injection of the
compartment in case of leakage, with the following properties:
Technical Data Main requirement
Thickness 8.0 mm
Diameter 180 mm
Standards / Approvals Quality management system to EN ISO 9001/14001
Form PVC-P Disc
Appearance / Colour Surface: Smooth
Colour: Yellow
Packaging Delivered as individual units
Storage Conditions Discs must be stored in their original packaging in cool and dry
conditions between 5°C and 30°C, protected from direct sunlight,
rain, snow and ice, etc.
Shelf Life Product does not expire if correctly stored
SikaFuko® VT 1 (Injectable Hose): An injectable hose with unique integral ‘valves’ for sealing and possibly resealing
construction joints in watertight structures against water and salt water ingress, with the following properties:
Form PVC hose with Neoprene cellular profile strips
encased in polyester mesh
Page: 10 of 18
Appearance/ Color Rolled, prefabricated, yellow coloured hose

Chemical Base Yellow inner core PVC
Yellow profile strips Neoprene based cellur rubber
Mesh Polyester
Shore A Hardness DIN EN ISO 868 Yellow inner core: 85 +/- 3
Yellow profile strips: 20 +/- 5
Elongation at Break DIN EN ISO 527 Yellow inner core: 250%
Yellow profile strips: 300%
Mesh: 30%
Tensile Strength DIN EN ISO 527 Yellow inner core: 14 N/mm2
Yellow profile strips: 3 N/mm2
Mesh: 30 N/mm2
Sika® Injection-306 (Elastic Polyacrylic Injection Resin): Very low viscosity, elastic, polyacrylic injection resin with a
versatile and adjustable reaction time used for permanent watertight sealing with the following properties:
Description Very low viscosity, elastic, polyacrylic injection resin with a
versatile and adjustable reaction time
Chemical Base 3-part polyacrylic resin
Density (at 20°C) Component A (Resin): ~ 1.10 kg/lt
Accelerator: ~ 1.10 kg/lt
Hardener powder: ~ 1.20 kg/lt (after dissolution in water)
Viscosity (at +20°C) Of mixture: ~ 3-11 mPa·s
Reaction Time 8 to 50 minutes
Mixing Ratios A : Component A (Resin) : Accelerator / Water 4:1
B : Water : Hardener powder 100 : 0,8
A:B 1:1
4. Treatment Grouts for the Pile head: Physical properties complying with the following:
Sikacrete®-114 AE (Free Flowing Micro-concrete for pile head): One component, free-flowing, high strength, cement
based micro-concrete with a maximum aggregate size of 10mm for pile head re-profiling and anchoring of PVC water
stops, with the following properties:
Density ~ 2400 kg/m3 (fresh mortar)
Yield ~ 18 lt per 40 kg bag
Compressive Strength BS 1881 1 Day : > 35 N/mm2 (+25 OC)
(3.5 lt water / 40 kg) 7 Day : > 50 N/mm2 (+25 OC)
28 Day : > 65 N/mm2 (+25 OC)
Tensile Strength 28 Day : > 8 - 10 N/mm2 (+25 OC)
Bond Strength BS 1881 ~ 2.0 N/mm2 (+25 OC) concrete failure
Modulus of Elasticity ASTM C 469-94 ~ 33,000 N/mm2
Coefficient of Thermal 11 x 10-6 mm/OC
Expansion
Expansion ASTM C 157 ~ +0.055% @ 28 days
Water Permeability BS EN 12390 Nil @ 5 bar after 28 days
Water Absorption BS 1881 ~ 1.3 % after 28 days
Page: 11 of 18
Sikadur®-42 PC (Epoxy Grout for pile head): Three-Part, solvent-free, high strength, castable and moisture tolerant
epoxy grouting system specially designed for pile cap applications, with the following properties:
Chemical Base Epoxy Resins and natural aggregates
Density (at 23°C) ~ 2.20 kg/lt (mixed)
Layer thickness 10 mm minimum
100 mm maximum
Change of Volume 2.76 N/mm2 (400 psi/ 21’000 N) (+60°C)
Creep: ASTM C1181 0.11%
Linear Shrinkage: ASTM C531 0.032%
EN 52450 0.02%
Thermal Expansion ASTM C531 2.1x10-5 mm/mm/°C
Coefficient (Temp. range -30°C - +30°C)
3.8x10-5 mm/mm/°C
(Temp. range +24°C - +100°C)
Water Absorption ASTM C413 0.055% (7 days)
Coefficient W
Thermal Stability Heat Deflection Temperature HDT:
ISO 75
HDT = +54°C (7 days / +23°C)
Effective Bearing Area ASTM C1339 90%
Compressive strength (ASTM C579) ~100 - 107 N/mm2
Flexural strength ASTM C580 ~ 30 - 35 N/mm2
Tensile Strength ASTM D638 ~ 15 - 20 N/mm2
Adhesion (on Concrete) ~ 3.5 N/mm2 (Concrete failure)
E-Modulus ASTM D695-96 20’000 N/mm2
Elongation ASTM D638 ~ 1.6%
Elongation at Break ISO 75 0.1 ± 0.05% (7 days at +23°C)
Thermal Compatibility ASTM C884 Pass
Exotherm Peak ASTM D 2471 38°C (at +25°C)
B. Double layer system used for All levels below level of Tower Raft (Basement Lift Wells):
1. PVC-P Waterproofing membrane and the geotextile layer: Physical properties complying
with the following:
Sikaplan® WP 1100-20 HL (PVC-P Waterproofing Membrane Sheet): Waterproofing membrane with

minimum thickness of 2.00mm that shall be loosely laid with mechanical fixation and applied on two layers with
vacuum test applied in-between, with the following properties:
Description A homogeneous sheet waterproofing
membrane based on polyvinylchloride
(PVC-P) of thickness 2mm
Thickness EN 1849 - 2 2.0 (-5/+10%) mm
Mass per unit area EN 1849 - 2 2.60 (-5 /+10%) kg/m2
Water Permeability EN 14150: 2001 < 10-7 m3 x m-2 x d-1
(liquid tightness)
Page: 12 of 18
Tensile Strength ISO R 527 – 1/3/5 Machine: 17.0 (±2.0) N/mm2

Cross: 16.0 (±2.0) N/mm2
Tear Strength ISO 34 Method B; Machine: ≥ 42 kN/m
V=50 mm/min Cross: ≥ 42 kN/m
Elongation ISO R 527 – 1/3/5 Machine: ≥ 300%
Cross: ≥ 280%
Burst Strength EN 14151 D=1,0 m ≥ 50%
Static Puncture EN ISO 12236 2.35 (± 0.25) kN
Low Temperature EN 495-5 ≤ -20°C
Behaviour
Thermal Expansion ASTM D 696-91 190 x 10-6 (±50x10-6) 1/K
Weathering EN 12224, 350 MJ/m2 Remaining tensile strength and
ISO 527-3/5/100 elongation: ≥ 75 %
Micro Organism EN 12225; ISO 527-3/5 Change of tensile strength and
elongation: ≤ 15%
Oxidation EN 14575; ISO 527-3/5 Change of tensile strength and
elongation: ≤ 25%
(acid conditions) ISO 527-3/5
(alkaline conditions) ISO 527-3/5
(artificial disposal ISO 527-3/5
water)
Resistance to Root EN 14416:2002 Pass
Penetration
Reaction to Fire EN ISO 11925-2 Class E
Behaviour under EN 1928 (DIN 16726-5.11) 5 bar / 72hr (10 bar / 24hr)
Hydrostatic Pressure No leakage
Thermal Ageing EN 1296 (SIA V280-8) (70 d / 70°C)
Change of weight ≤ 2.0%
Change of tensile strength ≤ 20%
Elastic Modulus E1-2 ISO 527-1/3 Machine and cross direction:
≤ 20 N/mm2
Heat Distortion EN 1107-2 (SIA V280-4; DIN 6hr / 80°C
Dimensional Stability 16726-5.13) Machine and cross direction: ≤ 2.0%
Behaviour after heat exposure:
No blisters
Impact Resistance EN 1107-2 (SIA V280-4; DIN (500 g)
16726-5.12) No leakage at 750 mm
Long Term SIA V280-14 No leakage at 7 N/mm2 , (50hr)
Compression Strength
Behaviour after EN 1296 (SIA V280-13) 8mt / 50°C
Storage in Warm Change of weight ≤ 4.0%
Water Change of tensile strength ≤ 20%
Behaviour after EN 1847 (SIA V280-18; DIN (28 d / 23°C), H2SO3 (5%); Ca(OH)2
Page: 13 of 18
Storage in Aqueous 16726-5.18) (sat.); NaCI (10%)

Solutions Change of tensile strength ≤ 15%
Behaviour of Welding Tensile shearing test:
Break outside the welding seam
EN 12317-2 Short time welding factor: fz = ≥ 0.6
EN 12316-2 Peeling resistance: ≥ 6 N/mm
Bontec SNW 46 geotextile 350g/sq.m (Geotextile Protection layer): A cushion layer beneath the waterproofing
membrane of minimum 350 gr/m2 shall be installed on top of the blinding concrete which should be free from all
projections and loose materials. The geotextile membrane should be loose laid and overlapped minimum 100mm,
with the following properties:
Description Needle punched non-woven
polypropylene fabric geotextile layer of
minimum 350 gr/m2
Composition 100% polypropylene non-woven geotextile
Mass EN ISO 9864 350 g/m2
Tensile Strength EN ISO 10319 Machine: 25.9 kN/m (±3.4kN/m)
Cross: 27.9 kN/m (±3.6kN/m)
Elongation EN ISO 10319 Machine: 55 % (± 12.7 %)
Cross: 66 % (± 13.8 %)
Static Puncture Resistance EN ISO 12236 4.60 kN (± 0.96kN)
Dynamic Perforation Resistance EN ISO 13433 10 mm (±2.5 mm)
Protection Efficiency EN ISO 14574 442.0 N (± 88.4 N)
Thickness under 2 kPa EN ISO 9863-1 2.90 mm (±0.58 mm)
Geomat layer: Three dimensional mesh of polypropylene synthetic monofilaments of minimum 350 gr/m2and with the
following properties:
Material Base Polypropylene (PP)
Thickness EN 1849-2 8 mm (±15%)
Tensile Strength EN 12311-2
Longitudinal1) 60 N/5cm (±15%)
Transversal2) 30 N/5cm (±15%)
Working Temperature -20OC to +80OC
Reaction to Fire EN 13501-2 Class E
1)md = machine direction
2)cmd = cross machine direction
2. PVC-P Water stop and the injection and Control Flanges and hoses for back-up injection
system: Physical properties complying with the following:
Sika® Waterbar (PVC water stop for detailing): A PVC water stop 200-280mm wide for pile head detail, construction
joints and compartments welded to the membrane, with the following properties:
Description PVC-P flexible waterstops designed
for the sealing of compartment
Page: 14 of 18
system of Sikaplan® WP
waterproofing membranes.
Tensile Strength DIN 53455 ≥ 10 N/mm2
Elongation at Break DIN 53455 ≥ 200 %
Tear Strength DIN 53507 A) ≥ 12 N/mm2
Shore D Hardness DIN 53505 ~ 70 - 85
Chemical Resistance Water, seawater and sewage
Pass
(Permanent Exposure) at temperatures of 23°C
Chemical Resistance Dilute inorganic alkalis, mineral
Pass
(Temporary Exposure) acids and mineral oils
Alkali Resistance US Corps of Engineers: CRD-
Pass
C 572-65
Sikaplan® WP Control Socket (Injection Flanges): A PVC control and injection flanges for future injection of the
compartment in case of leakage, with the following properties:
Description Flanged injection sockets for waterproofing membrane repairs by
injection based on polyvinylchloride (PVC-P).
Thickness 8.0 mm
Diameter 180 mm
Standards / Approvals Quality management system to EN ISO 9001/14001
Form PVC-P Disc
Appearance / Colour Surface: Smooth
Colour: Yellow
Packaging Delivered as individual units
Storage Conditions Discs must be stored in their original packaging in cool and dry
conditions between 5°C and 30°C, protected from direct sunlight,
rain, snow and ice, etc.
Shelf Life Product does not expire if correctly stored
SikaFuko® VT 1 (Injectable Hose): An injectable hose with unique integral ‘valves’ for sealing and possibly resealing
construction joints in watertight structures against water and salt water ingress, with the following properties:
Description One Way Exhaust Valve - prewelded to a section
of Sikaplan polyolefin (FPO) based sheet
waterproofing membrane
Form PVC hose with Neoprene cellular profile strips
encased in polyester mesh
Appearance/ Color Rolled, prefabricated, yellow coloured hose
Chemical Base Yellow inner core PVC
Yellow profile strips Neoprene based cellur rubber
Mesh Polyester
Shore A Hardness DIN EN ISO 868 Yellow inner core: 85 +/- 3
Yellow profile strips: 20 +/- 5
Elongation at Break DIN EN ISO 527 Yellow inner core: 250%
Yellow profile strips: 300%
Mesh: 30%
Tensile Strength DIN EN ISO 527 Yellow inner core: 14 N/mm2
Page: 15 of 18
Yellow profile strips: 3 N/mm2

Mesh: 30 N/mm2
Sika® Injection-306 (Elastic Polyacrylic Injection Resin): Very low viscosity, elastic, polyacrylic injection resin with a
versatile and adjustable reaction time used for permanent watertight sealing with the following properties:
Description Very low viscosity, elastic, polyacrylic injection resin with a
versatile and adjustable reaction time
Chemical Base 3-part polyacrylic resin
Density (at 20°C) Component A (Resin): ~ 1.10 kg/lt
Accelerator: ~ 1.10 kg/lt
Hardener powder: ~ 1.20 kg/lt (after dissolution in water)
Viscosity (at +20°C) Of mixture: ~ 3-11 mPa·s
Reaction Time 8 to 50 minutes
Mixing Ratios A : Component A (Resin) : Accelerator / Water 4:1
B : Water : Hardener powder 100 : 0,8
A:B 1:1
3. Treatment Grouts for the Pile head: Physical properties complying with the following:
Sikacrete®-114 AE (Free Flowing Micro-concrete for pile head): One component, free-flowing, high strength, cement
based micro-concrete with a maximum aggregate size of 10mm for pile head re-profiling and anchoring of PVC water
stops, with the following properties:
Description One component, free-flowing, high
strength, cement based micro-concrete
with a maximum aggregate size of 10mm
Density ~ 2400 kg/m3 (fresh mortar)
Yield ~ 18 lt per 40 kg bag
Compressive Strength BS 1881 1 Day : > 35 N/mm2 (+25 OC)
(3.5 lt water / 40 kg) 7 Day : > 50 N/mm2 (+25 OC)
28 Day : > 65 N/mm2 (+25 OC)
Tensile Strength 28 Day : > 8 - 10 N/mm2 (+25 OC)
Bond Strength BS 1881 ~ 2.0 N/mm2 (+25 OC) concrete failure
Modulus of Elasticity ASTM C 469-94 ~ 33,000 N/mm2
Coefficient of Thermal 11 x 10-6 mm/OC
Expansion
Expansion ASTM C 157 ~ +0.055% @ 28 days
Water Permeability BS EN 12390 Nil @ 5 bar after 28 days
Water Absorption BS 1881 ~ 1.3 % after 28 days
Sikadur®-42 PC (Epoxy Grout for pile head): Three-Part, solvent-free, high strength, castable and moisture tolerant
epoxy grouting system specially designed for pile cap applications, with the following properties:
Description Three-part, solvent-free, high strength,
castable and moisture tolerant, epoxy
grouting system specially designed for
pile cap applications
Page: 16 of 18
Chemical Base Epoxy Resins and natural aggregates

Density (at 23°C) ~ 2.20 kg/lt (mixed)
Layer thickness 10 mm minimum
100 mm maximum
Change of Volume 2.76 N/mm2 (400 psi/ 21’000 N) (+60°C)
Creep: ASTM C1181 0.11%
Linear Shrinkage: ASTM C531 0.032%
EN 52450 0.02%
Thermal Expansion ASTM C531 2.1x10-5 mm/mm/°C
Coefficient (Temp. range -30°C - +30°C)
3.8x10-5 mm/mm/°C
(Temp. range +24°C - +100°C)
Water Absorption ASTM C413 0.055% (7 days)
Coefficient W
Thermal Stability Heat Deflection Temperature HDT:
ISO 75
HDT = +54°C (7 days / +23°C)
Effective Bearing Area ASTM C1339 90%
Compressive strength (ASTM C579) ~100 - 107 N/mm2
Flexural strength ASTM C580 ~ 30 - 35 N/mm2
Tensile Strength ASTM D638 ~ 15 - 20 N/mm2
Adhesion (on Concrete) ~ 3.5 N/mm2 (Concrete failure)
E-Modulus ASTM D695-96 20’000 N/mm2
Elongation ASTM D638 ~ 1.6%
Elongation at Break ISO 75 0.1 ± 0.05% (7 days at +23°C)
Thermal Compatibility ASTM C884 Pass
Exotherm Peak ASTM D 2471 38°C (at +25°C)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation and conditions
affecting performance of the Work. Identify conditions detrimental to a proper and timely completion and
notify the Engineer of the unsatisfactory conditions. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
B. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
C. Verify substrate surfaces are durable; free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing
system.
D. Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Repair and prepare the existing waterproofing membrane at locations where the new waterproofing
membrane needs to be connected. Follow membrane manufacturer's recommendations to ensure proper
connection.
Page: 17 of 18
B. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing.
C. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to membrane manufacturer.
E. Seal cracks and joints with sealant using depth to width ratio as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Membrane
1. Install membrane waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Roll out membrane. Minimize wrinkles and bubbles.
3. Overlap edges and ends and seal by method recommended by manufacturer and test joint.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane.
END OF SECTION
Page: 18 of 18
STANDARD SPECIFICATION Div. 31 0000 – Earthwork
WSP | Parsons Brinckerhoff Section 313116 Termite Control
SECTION 313116 TERMITE CONTROL .........................................................................................................2

PART 1 GENERAL .......................................................................................................................................2
1.1 SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................... 2
PART 2 GENERAL .......................................................................................................................................2
2.1 MATERIALS & WORK GENERALLY ............................................................................................. 2
2.2 APPLICATION ................................................................................................................................ 3
2.3 TREATMENT TO FOUNDATIONS – PAD FOOTINGS, RAFTS, PILE CAPS .............................. 3
2.4 TREATMENT UNDER GROUND BEARING SLABS ..................................................................... 3
2.5 TREATMENT TO JUNCTION OF WALL AND FLOOR ................................................................. 3
2.6 TREATMENT TO SUSCEPTIBLE ENTRY POINTS ...................................................................... 3
2.7 TREATMENT TO EXTERNAL WALL PERIMETER ....................................................................... 3
2.8 GUARANTEE ................................................................................................................................. 3
2.9 DILUTION RATIO ........................................................................................................................... 3
2.10 PRECAUTIONS .............................................................................................................................. 3
2.11 STAFF ............................................................................................................................................ 4
2.12 SAFETY .......................................................................................................................................... 4
2.13 EXPERIENCE ................................................................................................................................. 4
2.14 SPECIALISTS CONTRACTORS .................................................................................................... 4
Page: 1 of 4
SECTION 313116 TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. General: Read this Section in conjunction with other related Sections, Division 01 General Requirements,
Preliminaries and the Contract Conditions.
B. Prescriptive Work:
1. Refer to Contractor's Design Responsibilities in Section 011000 Summary for specific requirements.
2. Technical Requirements
a. General
1). The following Clause identifies the major areas for which Contractors design / design
development is required. This specification section is to be read in its entirety for other areas
where Contractor design / design development is required.
2). Major Areas For Contractor Design / Design Development
a). Refer to specification for requirements
PART 2 GENERAL
2.1 MATERIALS & WORK GENERALLY
A. Anti-termite treatment shall be applied to all buried structural concrete. Treatment shall also be required
around the perimeter of the structure in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. The
contractor, material and method statements shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval.
B. Termite proofing shall be provided by an approved sub-contractor. The treatment shall be carried out by
using any of the termicides belonging to the chemical groups approved by the Local Authorities,
Municipality Public Health Department, Ministry of Agriculture and Fisheries/Ministry of
Environment/Ministry of Health in the concentrations and dosage prescribed below.
Approx. concentration to be achieved in the soil
Active ingredient per sq.mtr.

Chemical Min end use concentration PPM
Organophosphate
2.00% 100 gms 2000
Synthetic
0.5% 25 gms 500
Pyrethroid
Table 1 Chemicals
C. After reading the structural/architectural drawings, specialist sub-contractor will submit the following
information:
1. Type of chemical used
2. Concentrate available commercially

3. End-use concentration and total chemical concentration estimated to be consumed for the project.
(The basis for estimation of the total chemical concentration required shall be arrived at by showing the
Page: 2 of 4
stage wise requirement of the end use concentration (emulsion). This total quantity shall be kept on
site in sealed drums which shall be properly labelled and show the date of manufacture and expiry.)
2.2 APPLICATION
A. The treatment shall apply to below all foundations, slabs and ground beams and will commence after
levelling/compaction of the filled soil and before blinding/polythene/damp proof membrane is laid. The
treatment shall be applied irrespective of the level of the water table.
2.3 TREATMENT TO FOUNDATIONS – PAD FOOTINGS, RAFTS, PILE CAPS
A. After excavation and compaction of the earth at founding level the compacted surface shall be treated/
sprayed with approved termiticide emulsion at the rate of five litres/m2.
2.4 TREATMENT UNDER GROUND BEARING SLABS
A. After final compaction of the backfill, hard core, sand blinding and before laying the damp proof sheet,
approved termiticide solution shall be sprayed evenly on the compacted surface at the rate of five
litres/m2. Care shall be taken to ensure that the entire surface is treated.
2.5 TREATMENT TO JUNCTION OF WALL AND FLOOR
A. Termiticide solution shall be sprayed simultaneously at the rate of two litres/lm, all along the wall and floor
junction of the plinth beams. A small trench shall be made along junction to check that the termiticide
solution percolates along the junction instead.
2.6 TREATMENT TO SUSCEPTIBLE ENTRY POINTS
A. Soil around utility entry points and service pipes shall be thoroughly drenched with the termiticide solution
to prevent entry of subterranean termites.
2.7 TREATMENT TO EXTERNAL WALL PERIMETER
A. A small trench shall be dug in the compacted surface of the external wall perimeter and filled with
termiticide solution at the rate of five litres per linear metre of external wall. After the solution has seeped in
to the soil the trench shall be back filled with treated soil to maintain the barrier.
2.8 GUARANTEE
A. On completion of the treatment in all respects, guarantee of 20 years shall be provided. In the unlikely
event of re-infestation during the guarantee period contractor shall submit his proposals for rectification to
the Engineer and all necessary treatment shall be carried out and maintained over the period at no extra
cost.
2.9 DILUTION RATIO
A. Dilution ratio shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions or as directed by the
Engineer.
2.10 PRECAUTIONS
A. Precautions shall be taken not to disturb the treated areas by re-levelling, digging or earth filling, as this will
break the chemical barrier. In case such a situation arises, the area is to be treated again to restore the
chemical barrier.
Page: 3 of 4
2.11 STAFF
A. The staff shall have suitable qualifications and experience to carry out the termite treatment.
2.12 SAFETY
A. The Contractor shall list availability of safety and protective equipment and procedures
2.13 EXPERIENCE
A. The Contractor shall provide a list of properties treated against termites, mentioning the period and
references.
2.14 SPECIALISTS CONTRACTORS
A. Termite protection shall be carried out by a specialist sub-contractor approved by Dubai Municipality for
such work.
END OF SECTION
Page: 4 of 4
JUMEIRAH GATE

170504-37451760-Structural Specs-Tender Addendum

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

170504-37451760-Structural Specs-Tender Addendum

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TENDER ADDENDUM SPECIFICATION

PROJECT NUMBER AHR JBR/2016

LEAD CONSULTANT WSP | PARSONS Brinckerhoff

LEAD ARCHITECT KILLA DESIGN

INTERIOR DESIGN KCA INTERNATIONAL

FAÇADE & BMU CONSULTANT KOLTAY FACADES

LANDSCAPE CONSULTANT Keo International Consultants

PARKING & TIS CONSULTANT AURECON

SPECIALIST LIGHTING LIGHTING DESIGN

AV / ICT CONSULTANT PMK INTERNATIONAL

ACOUSTIC CONSULTANT ACOUSTIC LOGIC

SPA CONSULTANT THE WELLNESS

ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT GlobalTech

QUANTITY SURVEYOR & Cost TURNER & TOWNSEND

SECTION 01 4517 – STRUCTURAL MOVEMENTS AND BUILDING TOLERANCES .......................................................................... 2

1.1 SUMMARY ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ....................................................................................................................................................... 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................................................................. 4

2.1 DESIGN CRITERIA ............................................................................................................................................................. 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................... 8

3.1 TOLERANCES ................................................................................................................................................................... 8

3.2 STRUCTURAL TOLERANCES, CONCRETE ........................................................................................................................... 9

3.3 STRUCTURAL TOLERANCES, STEEL ................................................................................................................................... 9

3.4 CONTROL OF BUILDING MOVEMENTS ........................................................................................................................... 10

3.5 INSTRUMENTATION ...................................................................................................................................................... 10

3.6 BUILDING MOVEMENT REPORTS ................................................................................................................................... 10

SECTION 01 4517 – STRUCTURAL MOVEMENTS AND BUILDING TOLERANCES

B. Appointment of independent specialist

D. Related Sections and Documentation

1. Section 03 0000 - Concrete - General

2. Section 03 1100 - Concrete Forming and finishing

3. Section 03 3800 – Post Tensioned Slab

4. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing

E. Section Purpose Description

d. Estimated deflections of the main structural elements.

e. Outline details of the main structural elements designed by the Engineer.

f. To highlight the requirements for coordination with adjacent elements.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Tests: Static Modulus of Elasticity to ASTM C 469-94

Sampling: see drawing 00005-AJB-WSP-SW-Z-00-Z-DR-STR-00005 and section 30000 Concrete –

2.1 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Lateral Movements, General

1. Building lateral movements shall result from combinations of the following

b. Dead load drift due to differential axial shortening.

e. Thermal expansion and contraction of the building materials.

B. Lateral Movement, Concrete Frame

C. Lateral Movement, Steel Structure

D. Vertical Movement, General

1. Building vertical movements shall result from combinations of the following:

c. Superimposed floor live loads.

e. Thermal expansion and contraction of the building materials.

f. Axial shortening due to creep and shrinkage of concrete or composite elements.

E. Vertical Movement, Concrete Frame

1. The Design has limited vertical movements to the following:

b. Differential movements due to imposed loads:

1). Beam, Internal Span = Span/ 360.

2. Differential Movements occurring after attachment of non-structural elements

3. Estimated Movements, Design Assumptions and Limitations:

5. Possible factors include the following:

e. Variability of the structural properties of concrete.

f. Variability in loading rates.

6. Applicable load cases:

b. The deflection due to the self-weight of the cladding: SDLC.

F. Vertical Movement, Steel Frame